2008 Lincoln MKZ Owners Manual

Table of Contents
Introduction 4
Instrument Cluster 10
Warning lights and chimes 10
Gauges 14
Entertainment Systems 16
AM/FM stereo with CDX6/MP3 16
Auxiliary input jack (Line in) 23
USB port 25
Satellite radio information 26
Navigation system 30
SYNC 30
Climate Controls 31
Automatic temperature control 31
Rear window defroster 36
Lights 37
Headlamps 37
Turn signal control 41
Bulb replacement 42
Driver Controls 52
Windshield wiper/washer control 52
Steering wheel adjustment 53
Power windows 56
Mirrors 58
Speed control 60
Moon roof 65
Message center 70
Locks and Security 80
Keys 80
Locks 82
Anti-theft system 96
2008 MKZ (378)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Table of Contents
Seating and Safety Restraints 102
Seating 102
Safety restraints 110
Airbags 124
Child restraints 139
Tires, Wheels and Loading 151
Tire information 151
Tire inflation 153
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) 166
Vehicle loading 171
Trailer towing 176
Recreational towing 176
Driving 178
Starting 178
Brakes 183
Traction Control™/AdvanceTrac威 185
Transmission operation 186
Roadside Emergencies 198
Getting roadside assistance 198
Hazard flasher switch 199
Fuel pump shut-off switch 200
Fuses and relays 200
Changing tires 207
Lug nut torque 212
Jump starting 213
Wrecker towing 218
Customer Assistance 220
Reporting safety defects (U.S. only) 226
Reporting safety defects (Canada only) 227
Cleaning 228
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Table of Contents
Maintenance and Specifications 235
Engine compartment 237
Engine oil 239
Battery 243
Engine coolant 245
Fuel information 251
Air filter(s) 265
Part numbers 266
Maintenance product specifications and capacities 267
Engine data 269
Accessories 272
Index 274
All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic or mechanical

including photocopying, recording or by any information storage and retrieval
system or translation in whole or part is not permitted without written
authorization from Ford Motor Company. Ford may change the contents without
notice and without incurring obligation.
Copyright © 2007 Ford Motor Company
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Introduction
CALIFORNIA Proposition 65 Warning
WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and
certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to
the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known
to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
PERCHLORATE MATERIAL
Certain components of this vehicle such as airbag modules, seat belt
pretensioners, and button cell batteries may contain Perchlorate Material
– Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
CONGRATULATIONS
Congratulations on acquiring your new Lincoln. Please take the time to
get well acquainted with your vehicle by reading this handbook. The
more you know and understand about your vehicle, the greater the
safety and pleasure you will derive from driving it.
For more information on Ford Motor Company and its products visit the
following website:
• In the United States: www.ford.com
• In Canada: www.ford.ca
• In Mexico: www.ford.com.mx
• In Australia: www.ford.com.au
Additional owner information is given in separate publications.
This Owner’s Guide describes every option and model variant available
and therefore some of the items covered may not apply to your
particular vehicle. Furthermore, due to printing cycles it may describe
options before they are generally available.
Remember to pass on the Owner’s Guide when reselling the vehicle. It
is an integral part of the vehicle.
Fuel pump shut-off switch: In the event of an accident the
safety switch will automatically cut off the fuel supply to the
engine. The switch can also be activated through sudden vibration (e.g.
collision when parking). To reset the switch, refer to the Fuel pump
shut-off switch in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Introduction
SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION
Warning symbols in this guide

How can you reduce the risk of personal injury to yourself or others? In
this guide, answers to such questions are contained in comments
highlighted by the warning triangle symbol. These comments should be
read and observed.
Warning symbols on your vehicle

When you see this symbol, it is
imperative that you consult the
relevant section of this guide before
touching or attempting adjustment
of any kind.
Protecting the environment
We must all play our part in
protecting the environment. Correct
vehicle usage and the authorized
disposal of waste, cleaning and
lubrication materials are significant
steps towards this aim. Information in this respect is highlighted in this
guide with the tree symbol.
BREAKING-IN YOUR VEHICLE
Your vehicle does not need an extensive break-in. Try not to drive
continuously at the same speed for the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of
new vehicle operation. Vary your speed frequently in order to give the
moving parts a chance to break in.
Do not add friction modifier compounds or special break-in oils since
these additives may prevent piston ring seating. See Engine oil in the
Maintenance and Specifications chapter for more information on oil
usage.
SPECIAL NOTICES
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
For a detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered by
your vehicle’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty, refer to the Warranty
Guide that is provided to you along with your Owner’s Guide.
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Introduction
Special instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic
controls.
Please read the section Airbag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter. Failure to
follow the specific warnings and instructions could result in personal
injury.
Front seat mounted rear-facing child or infant seats should

NEVER be placed in front of an active passenger airbag.
Service Data Recording

Service data recorders in your vehicle are capable of collecting and
storing diagnostic information about your vehicle. This potentially
includes information about the performance or status of various systems
and modules in the vehicle, such as engine, throttle, steering or brake
systems. In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle, Ford
Motor Company, Ford of Canada, and service and repair facilities may
access vehicle diagnostic information through a direct connection to your
vehicle when diagnosing or servicing your vehicle.
Event Data Recording
Other modules in your vehicle — event data recorders — are capable of
collecting and storing data during a crash or near crash event. The
recorded information may assist in the investigation of such an event.
The modules may record information about both the vehicle and the
occupants, potentially including information such as:
• how various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• whether or not the driver and passenger seatbelts were buckled;
• how far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or the
brake pedal;
• how fast the vehicle was traveling; and
• where the driver was positioning the steering wheel.
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Introduction
To access this information, special equipment must be directly connected
to the recording modules. Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada do
not access event data recorder information without obtaining consent,
unless pursuant to court order or where required by law enforcement,
other government authorities or other third parties acting with lawful
authority. Other parties may seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada.
Cell phone use
The use of Mobile Communications Equipment has become increasingly
important in the conduct of business and personal affairs. However,
drivers must not compromise their own or others’ safety when using
such equipment. Mobile Communications can enhance personal safety
and security when appropriately used, particularly in emergency
situations. Safety must be paramount when using mobile communications
equipment to avoid negating these benefits.
Mobile Communication Equipment includes, but is not limited to cellular
phones, pagers, portable email devices, in-vehicle communications
systems, telematics devices and portable two-way radios.
Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control,
accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that drivers use
extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off
the road. The drivers primary responsibility is the safe operation of
their vehicle. Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to
the driving task when it is safe to do so.
Export unique (Non–United States/Canada) vehicle specific

information
For your particular global region, your vehicle may be equipped with
features and options that are different from the ones that are described
in this Owner’s Guide. A market unique supplement may be supplied
that complements this book. By referring to the market unique
supplement, if provided, you can properly identify those features,
recommendations and specifications that are unique to your vehicle. This
Owner’s Guide is written primarily for the U.S. and Canadian Markets.
Features or equipment listed as standard may be different on units built
for Export. Refer to this Owner’s Guide for all other required
information and warnings.
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Introduction
These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle.
Vehicle Symbol Glossary
Safety Alert See Owner’s Guide
Fasten Safety Belt Airbag - Front
Child Seat Lower

Airbag - Side
Anchor
Child Seat Tether

Brake System
Anchor
Anti-Lock Brake System Parking Brake System
Brake Fluid -
Parking Aid System
Non-Petroleum Based
Stability Control System Speed Control
Master Lighting Switch Hazard Warning Flasher
Fog Lamps-Front Fuse Compartment
Fuel Pump Reset Windshield Wash/Wipe
Windshield Rear Window

Defrost/Demist Defrost/Demist
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Introduction
Vehicle Symbol Glossary
Power Windows
Power Window Lockout
Front/Rear
Child Safety Door Interior Luggage

Lock/Unlock Compartment Release
Panic Alarm Engine Oil
Engine Coolant
Engine Coolant
Temperature
Do Not Open When Hot Battery
Avoid Smoking, Flames,

Battery Acid
or Sparks
Explosive Gas Fan Warning
MAX
Maintain Correct Fluid
Power Steering Fluid MIN
Level
Service Engine Soon Engine Air Filter
Passenger Compartment
Jack
Air Filter
Low Tire Pressure

Check Fuel Cap
Warning
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
WARNING LIGHTS AND CHIMES
Warning lights and gauges can alert you to a vehicle condition that may
become serious enough to cause extensive repairs. A warning light may
illuminate when a problem exists with one of your vehicle’s functions.
Many lights will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure the
bulbs work. If any light remains on after starting the vehicle, refer to the
respective system warning light for additional information.
Service engine soon: The Service
engine soon indicator light
illuminates when the ignition is first
turned to the ON position to check
the bulb and to indicate whether the vehicle is ready for
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing. Normally, the ⬙Service engine soon⬙
light will stay on until the engine is cranked, then turn itself off if no
malfunctions are present. However, if after 15 seconds the ⬙Service
engine soon⬙ light blinks eight times, it means that the vehicle is not
ready for I/M testing. See the Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance
(I/M) testing in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
Solid illumination after the engine is started indicates the On Board
Diagnostics System (OBD-II) has detected a malfunction. Refer to On
board diagnostics (OBD-II) in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter. If the light is blinking, engine misfire is occurring which could
damage your catalytic converter. Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid
heavy acceleration and deceleration) and have your vehicle serviced
immediately by your authorized dealer.
10
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Under engine misfire conditions, excessive exhaust temperatures

could damage the catalytic converter, the fuel system, interior
floor coverings or other vehicle components, possibly causing a fire.
Check fuel cap: Illuminates when

the fuel cap may not be properly
installed. Continued driving with
this light on may cause the Service
engine soon warning light to come
on, refer to Fuel filler cap in the
Maintenance and Specification chapter.
Brake system warning light: To
confirm the brake system warning ! P
light is functional, it will
momentarily illuminate when the BRAKE
ignition is turned to the ON position
when the engine is not running, or in a position between ON and START,
or by applying the parking brake when the ignition is turned to the ON
position. If the brake system warning light does not illuminate at this
time, seek service immediately from your authorized dealer. Illumination
after releasing the parking brake indicates low brake fluid level or a
brake system malfunction and the brake system should be inspected
immediately by your authorized dealer.
Driving a vehicle with the brake system warning light on is
dangerous. A significant decrease in braking performance may
occur. It will take you longer to stop the vehicle. Have the vehicle
checked by your authorized dealer. Driving extended distances with
the parking brake engaged can cause brake failure and the risk of
personal injury.
Anti-lock brake system: If the

ABS light stays illuminated or
continues to flash, a malfunction has ABS
been detected, have the system
serviced immediately by your
authorized dealer. Normal braking is still functional unless the brake
warning light also is illuminated.
11
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Airbag readiness: If this light fails
to illuminate when the ignition is
turned to ON, continues to flash or
remains on, have the system
serviced immediately by your authorized dealer. A chime will also sound
when a malfunction in the supplemental restraint system has been
detected.
Safety belt: Reminds you to fasten
your safety belt. A Belt-Minder威
chime will also sound to remind you
to fasten your safety belt. Refer to
the Seating and Safety Restraints
chapter to activate/deactivate the Belt-Minder威 chime feature.
Charging system: Illuminates when
the battery is not charging properly.
Engine oil pressure: Illuminates

when the oil pressure falls below the
normal range, refer to Engine oil in
the Maintenance and
Specifications chapter.
Traction Control™: Illuminates
when the Traction Control™ is
active. If the light remains on, have
the system serviced immediately,
refer to the Driving chapter for
more information.
Low tire pressure warning:
Illuminates when your tire pressure
is low. If the light remains ON at
start up or while driving, the tire
pressure should be checked. Refer
to Inflating your tires in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter. When
the ignition is first turned to ON, the light will illuminate for 3 seconds to
ensure the bulb is working. If the light does not turn ON or begins to
flash, have the system inspected by your authorized dealer. For more
information on this system, refer to Tire pressure monitoring system
TPMS in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter.
12
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Speed control: Illuminates when
the speed control is engaged. Turns
off when the speed control system
is disengaged.
O/D off: Illuminates when the

overdrive function of the
O/D
transmission has been turned OFF, OFF
refer to the Driving chapter. If the
light does not illuminate, have the transmission serviced soon, or damage
may occur.
Anti-theft system: Flashes when
the SecuriLock™ Passive Anti-theft
System has been activated.
Throttle Control/Transmission:
Illuminates when a powertrain or a
AWD fault has been detected.
Contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
Door ajar (if equipped):
Illuminates when the ignition is in
the ON position and any door or
decklid is open.
Turn signal: Illuminates when the
left or right turn signal or the
hazard lights are turned on. If the
indicators flash faster, check for a burned out bulb.
High beams: Illuminates when the
high beam headlamps are turned on.
Key-in-ignition warning chime: Sounds when the key is left in the

ignition in the OFF/LOCK or ACCESSORY position and the driver’s door
is opened.
Headlamps on warning chime: Sounds when the headlamps or parking
lamps are on, the ignition is off (the key is not in the ignition) and the
driver’s door is opened.
13
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Parking brake ON: Sounds when the parking brake is left ON and the
vehicle is driven. If the warning stays on after the park brake is off,
contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
GAUGES
Speedometer: Indicates the

current vehicle speed.
Engine coolant temperature

gauge: Indicates engine coolant
temperature. At normal operating
temperature, the needle will be in
the normal range (between “H” and
“C”). If it enters the red section,
the engine is overheating. Stop
the vehicle as soon as safely
possible, switch off the engine and let the engine cool.
Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is
running or hot.
14
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Fuel gauge: Indicates
approximately how much fuel is left
in the fuel tank (when the ignition
is in the ON position). The fuel
gauge may vary slightly when the
vehicle is in motion or on a grade.
The FUEL icon and arrow indicates
which side of the vehicle the fuel
filler door is located.
Refer to Filling the tank in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter for more information.
Tachometer: Indicates the engine
speed in revolutions per minute.
Driving with your tachometer
pointer continuously at the top of
the scale may damage the engine.
Odometer: Registers the total miles

(kilometers) of the vehicle.
Refer to Message center in the
Driver Controls chapter on how to
switch the display from Metric to
English.
Trip odometer: Registers the miles
(kilometers) of individual journeys.
Press and release the message
center INFO button until “TRIP”
appears in the display (this
represents the trip mode). Press the
control again to select Trip A and Trip B features. Press and hold the
RESET button for two seconds to reset.
15
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
AUDIO SYSTEMS
Premium/Audiophile AM/FM in-dash six CD/MP3 satellite

compatible sound system (if equipped)

Accessory delay: Your vehicle is equipped with accessory delay. With

this feature, the window controls, radio and moon roof (if equipped) may
be used for up to ten minutes after the ignition is turned off or until
either front door is opened.
16
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
THX: Your vehicle may be equipped
with the THX威 II certified premium
audio system. This system creates
optimal acoustic quality for all
seating positions and road
conditions. The system offers an
advanced speaker system,
amplifiers, subwoofer and
equalization.
1. Memory presets: To set a
station: Select frequency band
AM/FM1/FM2; tune to a station,
press and hold a preset button until
sound returns. PRESET # will appear in the display. You may store up to
18 stations, six presets in AM, FM1 and FM2.
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), there are 18 available presets,
six each for SAT1, SAT2 and SAT3. To save satellite channels in your
memory presets, tune to the desired channel then press and hold a
preset control until sound returns.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS subscription.
Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
2. (Eject): Press to eject the
current CD. To eject a specific CD,
press Eject and the corresponding
memory preset. Press and hold to
autoeject all discs in the system.
3. TUNE: In radio mode turn to go
up/down the frequency band in
individual increments.
In MP3 mode, turn to advance to
the next/previous MP3 folder.
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), press / to tune to the
next/previous channel.
In CATEGORY MODE, press / to scroll through the list of
available SIRIUS channel Categories (Pop, Rock, News, etc.). Refer to
Category Mode under Menu for further information.
17
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
: If your vehicle is equipped with SYNC, press to access SYNC
PHONE features. Refer to your SYNC supplement. for further
information. If your vehicle is not equipped with SYNC, the display will
read NO PHONE.
4. MENU: Press repeatedly to scroll
through the following modes:
Setting the clock: Your vehicle is equipped with an in-dash clock. Refer
to Clock in the Driver Controls Chapter for instructions on how to set
the time.
SATELLITE RADIO MENU (if equipped): Press MENU when satellite
radio mode is active to access. Press OK to enter into the satellite radio
menu. Press / to cycle through the following options:
• CATEGORY: Press OK to enter category mode. Press / to
scroll through the list of available SIRIUS channel Categories (Pop,
Rock, News, etc.) Press OK when the desired category appears in the
display. After a category is selected, press SEEK to search for that
specific category of channels only (i.e. ROCK). You may also select
CATEGORY ALL to seek all available SIRIUS categories and channels.
Press OK to close and return to the main menu.
• SAVE SONG: Press OK to save the currently playing song’s title in
the system’s memory. (If you try to save something other than a song,
CANT SAVE will appear in the display.) When the chosen song is
playing on any satellite radio channel, the system will alert you with
an audible prompt. Press OK while SONG ALERT is in the display and
the system will take you to the channel playing the desired song. You
can save up to 20 song titles. If you attempt to save more than 20
titles, the display will read REPLACE SONG? Press OK to access the
saved titles and press / to cycle through the saved titles. When
the song title appears in the display that you would like to replace,
press OK. SONG REPLACED will appear in the display.
• DELETE SONG: Press OK to delete a song from the system’s
memory. Press / to cycle through the saved songs. When the
song appears in the display that you would like to delete, press OK.
The song will appear in the display for confirmation. Press OK again
and the display will read SONG DELETED. If you do not want to
delete the currently listed song, press / to select either
RETURN or CANCEL.
Note: If there are no songs presently saved, the display will read NO
SONGS.
18
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
• DELETE ALL SONGS: Press OK to delete all song’s from the
system’s memory. The display will read ARE YOU SURE ? Press OK to
confirm deletion of all saved songs and the display will read ALL
DELETED.
Note: If there are no songs presently saved, the display will read NO
SONGS.
• ENABLE ALERTS / DISABLE ALERTS: Press OK to enable/disable
the satellite alert status which alerts you when your selected songs are
playing on a satellite radio channel. (The system default is disabled.)
SONG ALERTS ENABLED/DISABLED will appear in the display. The
menu listing will display the opposite state. For example, if you have
chosen to enable the song alerts, the menu listing will read DISABLE
as the alerts are currently on, so your other option is to turn them off.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
RBDS ON/OFF: Press / to turn RBDS ON or OFF.
Program Type: If RBDS is ON, press / to find the desired
program type, then use SEEK or SCAN to search for FM radio
stations broadcasting the desired program type. Press OK to close and
return to the main menu.
RBDS (Radio Broadcast Data System): Available in FM mode only.
Allows you to search RBDS-equipped stations for certain categories of
music or announcements. With RBDS ON, you may select from: Info
(Information), Alert, Test, Religious, R&B, Classical, Jazz, Oldies,
Country, Top 40, Soft and Rock as described under Program Type
above. When the desired category appears in the display, press
SEEK to initiate the search. The system will cycle through the
frequency bands searching for stations broadcasting the selected
category type. If the desired program type is not found after searching
the frequency band three times, the search will stop. The announcement
categories are as follows:
• Alert: Searches for RBDS stations actively broadcasting important
messages relating to weather or government emergencies.
• Test: Searches for RBDS stations actively broadcasting a test message.
AUTOSET: Allows you to set the strongest local radio stations without
losing your original manually set preset stations for AM/FM1/FM2.
Use / to turn on/off.
19
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
When the six strongest stations are filled, the station stored in preset 1
will begin playing. If there are less than six strong stations, the system
will store the last one in the remaining presets.
BASS: Press / to adjust the bass setting. Press OK to close and
TREBLE: Press / to adjust the treble setting. Press OK to close
and return to the main menu.
BALANCE: Press / to adjust the audio between the left and right
speakers. Press OK to close and return to the main menu.
FADE: Press / to adjust the audio between the front and rear
speakers. Press OK to close and return to the main menu.
SPEED SENSITIVE VOLUME: Radio volume automatically changes
slightly with vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise.
Use / to adjust. Recommended level is 1–3. Level 0 turns the
feature off and level 7 is the maximum setting. Press OK to close and
Occupancy mode (if equipped): Use / to select and optimize
sound for ALL SEATS, DRIVERS SEAT or REAR SEATS. Press OK to
close and return to the main menu.
COMPRESSION: Available in CD mode, this feature brings soft and
loud CD passages together for a more consistent listening level. Press
MENU until compression status is displayed. Press / to turn the
feature on/off. Press OK to close and return to the main menu.
5. / (Select): These controls
are used in Menu mode to select
various settings/options.
6. / OK:
Play/pause: In CD/MP3 mode, press
to pause the playing media. PAUSE
will appear in the display. Press again to return to the playing media.
OK: Use in various menu selections.
Your vehicle may be equipped with SYNC, a system which has special
phone and media features. For further information, refer to the SYNC
supplement.
20
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
7. SEEK : In radio or CD/MP3
mode: Press to access the next
strong station or track.
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), press SEEK to seek to the
next channel. If a specific category is selected, (Jazz, Rock, News, etc.),
press SEEK to seek to the next channel in the selected category.
Press and hold SEEK to fast seek through the next channels.
In TEXT MODE, press SEEK to view the additional display text
when “>” is active in the display.
In CATEGORY MODE, press SEEK to select a category.
8. FWD (Fast Forward): Press
FWD to manually advance in a
CD/MP3 track.
9. TEXT/SCAN: In radio mode,
when listening to a RBDS-equipped
station, press and release to view
the text information of the radio station, if available. Press and hold for a
brief sampling of radio stations.
In CD/MP3 mode, press and release to view the track title, artist name,
disc title or file name, if available. Press and hold for a brief sampling of
all tracks on the current disc.
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), press and release to enter
TEXT MODE and toggle between channel name/channel category and
the current song title/artist.
In TEXT MODE, sometimes the display requires additional text to be
displayed. When the “>” indicator is active, press SEEK to view the
additional display text. When the “<” indicator is active, press SEEK
to view the previous display text.
10. REV (Reverse): Press REV to
manually reverse in a CD/MP3 track.
11. SEEK: In radio or CD

mode:Press to access the previous
strong station or track.
21
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), press SEEK to seek to the
previous channel. If a specific category is selected, (Jazz, Rock, News,
etc.), press SEEK to seek to the previous channel in the selected
category. Press and hold SEEK to fast seek through the previous
channels.
In TEXT MODE, press SEEK to view the previous/additional
display text when “<” is active in the display.
In CATEGORY MODE, press SEEK to select a category.
12. SHUFFLE: Press to play all
tracks on the current disc in random
order.
13. AM/FM: Press to select
AM/FM1/FM2 frequency band.
14. CD: Press to enter CD mode. If

a CD is already loaded into the
system, CD play will begin where it
ended last. If no CD is loaded, NO DISC will appear in the display.
CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4.75 in (12
cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility,
certain recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not
function correctly when used in CD players. Dirty, warped or
damaged CDs, irregular shaped CDs, CDs with a scratch
protection film attached, and CDs with homemade paper
(adhesive) labels should not be inserted into the CD player. The
label may peel and cause the CD to become jammed. It is
recommended that homemade CDs be identified with permanent
felt tip marker rather than adhesive labels. Ballpoint pens may
damage CDs. Please contact your authorized dealer for further
information.
15. AUX: Press repeatedly to access
SAT1, SAT2 and SAT3 (Satellite
radio mode, if equipped), LINE IN
(Auxiliary audio mode) or SYNC (late availability - if equipped). To
return to radio mode, press AM/FM.
For location and further information on auxiliary audio mode, refer to
Auxiliary input jack later in this chapter.Satellite radio is available
only with a valid SIRIUS subscription. Check with your authorized
dealer for availability.
22
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Your vehicle may be equipped with SYNC, a multi media system with
special phone and media features. For further information, refer to the
SYNC supplement.
16. ON/OFF/Volume: Press to turn
ON/OFF. Turn to increase/decrease
volume.
If the volume is set above a certain
level and the ignition is turned off, the volume will come back on at a
“nominal” listening level when the ignition switch is turned back on.
17. CD slot: Insert a CD label side
up.
18. LOAD: Press to load a CD.

Press LOAD and a memory preset
to load to a specific slot. Press and
hold to autoload up to six CDs.
Auxiliary input jack (Line in)

Your vehicle is equipped with an

Auxiliary Input Jack (AIJ). The
Auxiliary Input Jack provides a way
to connect your portable music
player to the in-vehicle audio
system. This allows the audio from a
portable music player to be played
through the vehicle speakers with
high fidelity. To achieve optimal
performance, please observe the
following instructions when
attaching your portable music device to the audio system.
Required equipment:
1. Any portable music player designed to be used with headphones
23
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
2. An audio extension cable with stereo male 1/8 in. (3.5 mm)
connectors at each end
To play your portable music player using the auxiliary input jack:
1. Begin with the vehicle parked and the radio turned off.
2. Ensure that the battery in your portable music player is new or fully
charged and that the device is turned off.
3. Attach one end of the audio extension cable to the headphone output
of your player and the other end of the audio extension cable to the AIJ
in your vehicle.
4. Turn the radio on, using either a tuned FM station or a CD loaded into
the system. Adjust the volume to a comfortable listening level.
5. Turn the portable music player on and adjust the volume to 1/2 the
volume.
6. Press AUX on the vehicle radio repeatedly until LINE IN appears in
the display.
You should hear audio from your portable music player, although it may
be low.
7. Adjust the sound on your portable music player until it reaches the
level of the FM station or CD by switching back and forth between the
AUX and FM or CD controls.
Troubleshooting:
1. Do not connect the audio input jack to a line level output. Line level
outputs are intended for connection to a home stereo and are not
compatible with the AIJ. The AIJ will only work correctly with devices
that have a headphone output with a volume control.
2. Do not set the portable music player’s volume level higher than is
necessary to match the volume of the CD or FM radio in your audio
system as this will cause distortion and will reduce sound quality. Many
portable music players have different output levels, so not all players
should be set at the same levels. Some players will sound best at full
volume and others will need to be set at a lower volume.
3. If the music sounds distorted at lower listening levels, turn the
portable music player volume down. If the problems persists, replace or
recharge the batteries in the portable music player.
4. The portable music player must be controlled in the same manner
when it is used with headphones as the AIJ does not provide control
(play, pause, etc.) over the attached portable music player.
5. For safety reasons, connecting or adjusting the settings on your
portable music player should not be attempted while the vehicle is
24
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
moving. Also, the portable music player should be stored in a secure
location, such as the center console or the glove box, when the vehicle is
in motion. The audio extension cable must be long enough to allow the
portable music player to be safely stored while the vehicle is in motion.
USB port (if equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a

USB port inside your center console.
This feature allows you to plug in
media playing devices, memory
sticks, and also to charge devices if
they support this feature. For
further information on this feature,
refer to Accessing and using your
USB port in the SYNC supplement
or Navigation system supplement.
GENERAL AUDIO INFORMATION

Radio frequencies: AM and FM frequencies are established by the
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio and
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC). Those frequencies are:
AM: 530, 540–1700, 1710 kHz
FM: 87.7, 87.9–107.7, 107.9 MHz
Radio reception factors: There are three factors that can affect radio
reception:
• Distance/strength: The further you travel from a station, the weaker
the signal and the weaker the reception.
• Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, power lines, electric fences,
traffic lights and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
• Station overload: When you pass a broadcast tower, a stronger signal
may overtake a weaker one and play while the weak station frequency
is displayed.
25
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
CD/CD player care:
Do:
• Handle discs by their edges only. Never touch the playing surface.
• Inspect discs before playing. Clean only with an approved CD cleaner
and wipe from the center out.
Don’t:
• Expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods
of time.
• Clean using a circular motion.
CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4.75 in (12
cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility,
certain recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not
function correctly when used in Ford CD players. Dirty, warped
or damaged CDs, irregular shaped CDs, CDs with a scratch
protection film attached, and CDs with homemade paper
(adhesive) labels should not be inserted into the CD player. The
label may peel and cause the CD to become jammed. It is
recommended that homemade CDs be identified with permanent
felt tip marker rather than adhesive labels. Ballpoint pens may
damage CDs. Please contact your authorized dealer for further
information.
Audio system warranty and service: Refer to the Warranty Guide
for audio system warranty information. If service is necessary, see your
dealer or qualified technician.
Satellite radio information (if equipped)
Satellite radio channels: SIRIUS broadcasts a variety of music, news,
sports, weather, traffic and entertainment satellite radio channels. For
more information and a complete list of SIRIUS satellite radio channels,
visit www.sirius.com in the United States, www.sirius-canada.ca in
Canada, or call SIRIUS at 1–888–539–7474.
Satellite radio reception factors: To receive the satellite signal, your
vehicle has been equipped with a satellite radio antenna located on the
roof of your vehicle. The vehicle roof provides the best location for an
unobstructed, open view of the sky, a requirement of a satellite radio
system. Like AM/FM, there are several factors that can affect satellite
radio reception performance:
• Antenna Obstructions: For optimal reception performance, keep the
antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other
material as far away from the antenna as possible.
26
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
• Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can
interfere with your reception.
• Station overload: When you pass a ground based broadcast repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and result in an
audio mute.
Unlike AM/FM audible static, you will hear an audio mute when there is
a satellite radio signal interference. Your radio display may display NO
SIGNAL to indicate the interference.
SIRIUS satellite radio service: SIRIUS Satellite Radio is a subscription
based satellite radio service that broadcasts music, sports, news and
entertainment programming. A service fee is required in order to receive
SIRIUS service. Vehicles that are equipped with a factory installed
SIRIUS Satellite Radio system include:
• Hardware and limited subscription term, which begins on the date of
sale or lease of the vehicle.
• Online media player providing access to all 65 SIRIUS music channels
over the internet (U.S. customers only).
For information on extended subscription terms, contact SIRIUS at
1–888–539–7474.
Note: SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted right to change, rearrange, add
or delete programming including canceling, moving or adding particular
channels, and its prices, at any time, with or without notice to you. Ford
Motor Company shall not be responsible for any such programming
changes.
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number (ESN): This 12–digit
Satellite Serial Number is needed to activate, modify or track your
satellite radio account. You will need this number when communicating
with SIRIUS. While in Satellite Radio mode, you can view this number on
the radio display by pressing AUX and Preset 1 control simultaneously.
27
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Radio Display Condition Action Required

ACQUIRING Radio requires more No action required.
than two seconds to This message should
produce audio for the disappear shortly.
selected channel.
SAT FAULT Internal module or If this message does
system failure not clear within a short
present. period of time, or with
an ignition key cycle,
your receiver may have
a fault. See your
authorized dealer for
service.
INVALID CHNL Channel no longer This previously
available. available channel is no
longer available. Tune
to another channel. If
the channel was one of
your presets, you may
choose another channel
for that preset button.
UNSUBSCRIBED Subscription not Contact SIRIUS at
available for this 1–888–539–7474 to
channel. subscribe to the
channel, or tune to
another channel.
NO TEXT Artist information not Artist information not
available. available at this time on
this channel. The
system is working
properly.
28
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)

NO TEXT Song title information Song title information
not available. not available at this
time on this channel.
The system is working
properly.
NO TEXT Category information Category information
not available. not available at this
time on this channel.
The system is working
properly.
NO SIGNAL Loss of signal from You are in a location
the SIRIUS satellite or that is blocking the
SIRIUS tower to the SIRIUS signal (i.e.,
vehicle antenna. tunnel, under an
overpass, dense foliage,
etc). The system is
working properly. When
you move into an open
area, the signal should
return.
UPDATING _ XX Update of channel No action required. The
programming in process should take no
progress. The XX longer than one
number indicates the minute.
% complete.
CALL SIRIUS Satellite service has Call SIRIUS at
1–888–539–7474 been deactivated by 1–888–539–7474 to
SIRIUS Satellite re-activate or resolve
Radio. subscription issues.
29
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)

ANTENNA FAIL Internal failure or If this message does
configuration failurenot clear within a short
to satellite radio period of time, or with
antenna an ignition key cycle,
your receiver may have
a fault. See your
authorized dealer for
service.
SUB UPDATE Satellite service No action required. The
subscription has been process should take no
updated by SIRIUS longer than one
Satellite Radio minute.
NAVIGATION SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

Your vehicle may be equipped with a Navigation System. Refer to the
Navigation supplement for further information.
SYNC (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with SYNC, a hands-free communications
and entertainment system with special phone and media features. For
more information, please refer to the SYNC supplement or to the SYNC
section in the Navigation supplement (if equipped).
30
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Climate Controls
DUAL AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL (DATC) SYSTEM
WITH HEATED SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
Temperature conversion: To switch between Fahrenheit and Celsius,

refer to Units (English/Metric) in the Driver Controls chapter.
MAX A/C setting: In order to achieve maximum cooling performance,
press , A/C, , and set the temperature to 60°F (16°C) and the
highest blower setting.
1. Defrost: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster
and demister vents. Can be used to clear thin ice or fog from the
windshield. To exit select another mode.
2. Passenger side temperature control: Press to engage the dual zone
feature of the DATC system. Allows the passenger to choose and control
a different temperature than the driver, if desired.
3. R Rear defroster: Press to defrost the rear window. Refer to
Rear window defroster in this section for more information. If your
vehicle is equipped with both rear defroster and heated mirrors, the
same button will activate both.
4. DUAL zone selector: Press to engage/disengage separate passenger
side temperature control.
5. Passenger heated seat: Press to control the passenger heated
seat. Refer to Heated seats in the Seating and Safety Restraints
31
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Climate Controls
6. Recirculation control: Press to engage/disengage. Used to
manually enable or disable recirculated air operation. When activated,
recirculates air in the cabin thereby reducing the amount of time to cool
down the interior of the vehicle. May also help reduce undesired odors
from reaching the interior of the vehicle. Will work in all modes except
defrost. In automatic operation, the recirculated air operates
automatically as necessary to achieve the selected temperature.
7. Airflow direction control: Press to toggle through the air
distribution modes listed below. The selected mode will illuminate in the
display.
: Distributes air through the windshield defroster ducts, demister
outlets and the front and rear seat floor ducts. The system will
automatically provide outside air to reduce window fogging.
: Distributes air through the floor and rear seat floor ducts. The
system will automatically provide outside air to reduce window fogging.
: Distributes air through the instrument panel registers and the front
and rear seat floor ducts.
: Distributes air through the instrument panel registers.
8. A/C control: Press to activate/deactivate air conditioning. Use with
recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency. Engages
automatically in AUTO, (defrost) and (floor/defrost).
9. Driver heated seat control: Press to control the driver heated
seat. Refer to Heated seats in the Seating and Safety Restraints
10. Fan Speed: Press to manually increase or decrease the fan
speed. To return to automatic fan operation, press AUTO.
11. OFF: Outside air is shut out and the fan will not operate.
12. Driver’s side temperature control: Press to increase/decrease the
temperature in the vehicle cabin.
13. AUTO: To engage automatic temperature control, press AUTO and
select the desired temperature using the temperature control. The
system will automatically determine fan speed, airflow location, A/C on
or off, and outside or recirculated air, to heat or cool the vehicle to reach
the desired temperature.
14. EXT: Press to display outside temperature. Press again to display
cabin temperature settings.
32
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Climate Controls
Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC) system with heated
and cooled seats (if equipped)
Temperature conversion: To switch between Fahrenheit and Celsius,

refer to Units (English/Metric) in the Driver Controls chapter.
MAX A/C setting: In order to achieve maximum cooling performance,
press , A/C, , and set the temperature to 60° F (16° C) and the
highest blower setting.
1. Defrost: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster
and demister vents. Can be used to clear thin ice or fog from the
windshield. To exit select another mode.
2. Passenger side temperature control: Press to engage the dual zone
feature of the DATC system. Allows the passenger to choose and control
a different temperature than the driver, if desired.
3. R Rear defroster: Press to defrost the rear window. Refer to the
Rear window defroster section in this chapter for more information.
4. DUAL zone selector: Press to engage/disengage separate passenger
side temperature control.
5. Passenger heated seat: Press to control the passenger heated
seat. Refer to Heated and cooled seats in the Seating and Safety
Restraints chapter for more information.
6. Passenger cooled seat: Press to control the passenger cooled
seat. Refer to Heated and cooled seats in the Seating and Safety
Restraints chapter for more information.
33
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Climate Controls
7. Airflow direction control: Press to toggle through the air
distribution modes listed below. The selected mode will illuminate in the
display.
: Distributes air through the windshield defroster ducts, demister
outlets and the front and rear seat floor ducts. The system will
automatically provide outside air to reduce window fogging.
: Distributes air through the floor and rear seat floor ducts. The
system will automatically provide outside air to reduce window fogging.
: Distributes air through the instrument panel registers and the front
and rear seat floor ducts.
: Distributes air through the instrument panel registers.
8. Driver heated seat: Press to control the driver heated seat. Refer
to Heated and cooled seats in the Seating and Safety Restraints
9. Driver cooled seat: Press to control the driver cooled seat.
Refer to Heated and cooled seats in the Seating and Safety Restraints
10. Fan Speed: Press to manually increase or decrease the fan
speed. To return to automatic fan operation, press AUTO.
11. Recirculation control: Press to engage/disengage. Used to
manually enable or disable recirculated air operation. When activated,
recirculates air in the cabin thereby reducing the amount of time to cool
down the interior of the vehicle. May also help reduce undesired odors
from reaching the interior of the vehicle. Will work in all modes except
defrost. In automatic operation, the recirculated air operates
automatically as necessary to achieve the selected temperature.
12. EXT control: Press to display the outside air temperature. Press
again to return to interior temperature. Note: Exterior readings are most
accurate when the vehicle has been moving for a period of time.
13. A/C control: Press to activate/deactivate air conditioning. Use with
recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency. Engages
automatically in AUTO, (defrost) and (floor/defrost).
14. OFF: Outside air is shut out and the fan will not operate.
15. Driver’s side temperature control: Controls the temperature on
the driver side of the vehicle in dual zone and controls the temperature
of both the driver and passenger sides in single zone.
34
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Climate Controls
16. AUTO: Press to engage automatic temperature control. Use the
temperature control to select the desired temperature setting. The
system will automatically determine fan speed, airflow location, A/C on
or off, and outside or recirculated air to heat or cool the vehicle, allowing
it to reach the desired temperature. Press and hold AUTO for about two
seconds to toggle between single zone and dual zone temperature
control.
Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC) system operating tips
• To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather, place
the air flow selector in the position.
• To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle, do not drive with the
system OFF, or with recirculated air engaged and A/C off.
• Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the
airflow to the back seats.
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of
the windshield.
• To improve the A/C cool down, drive with the windows slightly open
for 2-3 minutes after start up or until the vehicle has been “aired out.”
• For maximum cooling performance (MAX A/C):
Automatic operation:
• Press AUTO for full automatic operation.
• Do not override A/C or (recirculated air).
• Set the temperature to 60°F (16°C).
Override operation:
• Select air distribution.
• Select A/C and (recirculated air). Use (recirculated air)
with A/C to provide colder airflow.
• Set the temperature to 60°F (16°C).
• Set highest fan speed initially, then adjust to maintain comfort.
In MAX A/C setting:
• Select the coolest temperature setting.
35
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Climate Controls
In (panel) or (panel/floor) modes:

• Select the coolest temperature setting.
• Select A/C and (recirculated air) to provide colder airflow.
• To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather:
1. Select .
2. Select A/C.
3. Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort.
4. Set the fan speed to the highest setting.
5. Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows.
To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents, close the vents
located in the middle of the instrument panel.
Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel as these
objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop.
REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER R

The rear defroster control is located on the climate control panel and
works to clear the rear window of fog and thin ice.
The ignition must be in the 3 (RUN) position to operate the rear window
defroster.
The rear defroster turns off automatically after 10 minutes or when the
ignition is turned to the 1 (LOCK) position. To manually turn off the
defroster before 10 minutes have passed, push the control again.
Do not use razor blades or other sharp objects to clean the inside
of the rear window or to remove decals from the inside of the
rear window. This may cause damage to the heated grid lines and
will not be covered by your warranty.
36
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Lights
HEADLAMP CONTROL
Turns the lamps off.
Turns on the parking lamps,
instrument panel lamps, license
plate lamps and tail lamps.
Turns the headlamps on.
Autolamp control
The autolamp system provides light
sensitive automatic on-off control of
the exterior lights normally
controlled by the headlamp control.
• To turn autolamps on, rotate the
control counterclockwise to .
• To turn autolamps off, rotate the
control clockwise to off.
The autolamp system also keeps the
lights on for a predetermined
amount of time after the ignition switch is turned to LOCK. You can
change the amount of time the lamps stay on by using the programming
procedure that follows:
Note: If the vehicle is equipped with autolamps, it will have the
headlamps on with windshield wipers feature. If the windshield
wipers are turned on (for a fixed period of time), the exterior lamps will
turn on with the headlamp control in the Autolamp position.
Autolamps - Programmable exit delay
Programmable exit delay allows the length of the autolamp exit delay to
be changed.
To program the auto lamp exit time delay:
1. Start with the ignition in the LOCK position and the headlamp control
in the autolamp position.
2. Turn the headlamp switch to off.
3. Turn the ignition switch to RUN and then back to LOCK.
37
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Lights
4. Turn the headlamp switch to the autolamp position. The headlamps
will turn on.
5. Wait the desired amount of time for the exit delay you want (up to
three minutes), then turn the headlamp switch to off. The headlamps
will turn off.
Fog lamp control

With the ignition on, the fog lamps
can be turned on when the
headlamp control is pulled toward
you and is in any of the following
positions:
• Parking lamps
• Low beams
• Autolamps (when active)
The fog lamps will not operate when
the high beams are active.
Daytime running lamps (DRL) (if equipped)

Turns on the front turn lamps.
To activate:
• the ignition must be in the ON position,
• the headlamp control is in the O (Off), autolamps or parking lamp
position and
• the transmission must be out of the P (Park) position.
Always remember to turn on your headlamps at dusk or during
inclement weather. The Daytime Running Lamp (DRL) system
does not activate the tail lamps and generally may not provide
adequate lighting during these conditions. Failure to activate your
headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision.
38
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Lights
High beams
Push the lever toward the
instrument panel to activate. Pull
the lever towards you to deactivate.
OFF
Flash to pass
Pull toward you slightly to activate
and release to deactivate.
PANEL DIMMER CONTROL

Use to adjust the brightness of the
instrument panel and all applicable
switches in the vehicle during
headlamp and parking lamp
operation.
Move the control to the full upright
position, past detent, to turn on the
interior lamps.
At dusk and dawn, the brightness
are illuminated to higher than
normal intensity to enhance contrast and visibility. The system
automatically “dims down” as ambient light reaches the dash-mounted
sensor. The interior control lights dim progressively in four steps until
they reach nighttime operating levels. Certain displays like the message
center and the climate control unit do not change with the dimmer
control till the dash-mounted sensor senses full night conditions.
39
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Lights
Note: If the battery is disconnected, discharged, or a new battery is
installed, the dimmer switch requires re-calibration. Rotate the dimmer
switch from the full dim position to the full Dome/ON position to reset.
This will ensure that your displays are visible under all lighting
conditions.
AIMING THE HEADLAMPS

The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed at the assembly plant.
If your vehicle has been in an accident, the alignment of your headlamps
should be checked by your authorized dealer.
Vertical aim adjustment

1. Park the vehicle directly in front of a wall or screen on a level surface,
approximately 25 feet (7.6 meters) away.
• (1) 8 feet (2.4 meters)
• (2) Center height of lamp to
ground
• (3) 25 feet (7.6 meters)
• (4) Horizontal reference line
2. Measure the height of the
headlamp bulb center from the
ground and mark an 8 foot (2.4
meter) horizontal reference line on
the vertical wall or screen at this
height (a piece of masking tape works well).
3. Turn on the low beam headlamps to illuminate the wall or screen and
open the hood.
To see a clearer light pattern for adjusting, you may want to block the
light from one headlamp while adjusting the other.
4. On the wall or screen you will
observe an area of high intensity
light. The top of the high intensity
area should touch the horizontal
reference line, if not, the beam will
need to be adjusted using the next
step.
40
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Lights
5. Locate the vertical adjuster on
each headlamp. Using a Phillips #2
screwdriver, turn the adjuster either
clockwise (to adjust down) or
counterclockwise (to adjust up).
The horizontal edge of the brighter
light should touch the horizontal
reference line.
6. Close the hood and turn off the
lamps.
HORIZONTAL AIM IS NOT REQUIRED FOR THIS VEHICLE AND IS
NON-ADJUSTABLE.
TURN SIGNAL CONTROL

• Push down to activate the left
turn signal.
• Push up to activate the right turn
signal.
INTERIOR LAMPS
Dome lamps and map lamps

The map lamps are located on the
overhead console. Press the controls
to turn on the lamps.
41
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Lights
Your vehicle may also have reading
lamps within the rear dome lamp(s).
Press the switches on either side of
the dome lamp to turn on the
lamps.
BULB REPLACEMENT
Headlamp condensation
The headlamps are vented to equalize pressure. When moist air enters
the headlamp(s) through the vents, there is a possibility that
condensation can occur. This condensation is normal and will clear
within 45 minutes of headlamp operation.
Using the right bulbs

Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below. Headlamp bulbs
must be marked with an authorized “D.O.T.” for North America and an
“E” for Europe to ensure lamp performance, light brightness and pattern
and safe visibility. The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly
or void the lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn
time.
Trade
Function Number of bulbs
number
Headlamp high beam 2 H7
H11LL (D1S
Headlamp low beam 2 [HID]
optional)
Front park/turn signal 3457AK
2
lamp (amber)
Front redundant park
4 168 NA
lamp
* Rear sidemarker lamp N/A LED
* Stop/tail lamp N/A LED
3157A
Rear turn signal lamp 2
(amber)
42
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Lights
Trade
Function Number of bulbs
number
Redundant tail lamp 8 161
Backup lamp 2 921
License plate lamp 2 C5WL
High-mount brake lamp 1 921
Fog lamp 2 H11
Front map lamp 2 12V6W
Rear dome/reading lamp 6 578
Glove box lamp 1 194
Visor vanity lamp - Slide
2 37 or 14V1CP
on Rail system (SOR)
Puddle lamp 2 W5W
Luggage compartment
1 578
lamp
All replacement bulbs are clear in color except where noted.
To replace all instrument panel lights - see your authorized dealer.
* To replace these lamps - see your authorized dealer.
Replacing exterior bulbs

Check the operation of all the bulbs frequently.
Replacing headlamp bulbs

Highbeam bulb replacement
1. Make sure headlamp switch is in the O (OFF) position, then open the
hood.
2. Reach over the front bolster.
3. Disengage top of flexible washer
bottle filler neck from snap strap
attachment and position it to gain
access to the high-beam bulb
(passenger side only).
43
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Lights
4. Remove the protective rubber cap
from the housing by grabbing it and
pulling rearward.
5. Remove the bulb socket by
rotating it counterclockwise, then
pulling it straight out of the lamp
assembly.
6. Carefully pull bulb straight out of

socket and push in the new one.
Handle a halogen headlamp
bulb carefully and keep out
of children’s reach. Grasp the bulb
only by its plastic base and do not
touch the glass. The oil from your
hand could cause the bulb to
break the next time the
headlamps are operated.
7. For ease of installation into the lamp assembly, hold the bulb socket at
15 degrees clockwise from a vertical position. Using the 2 lead wires
oriented exactly up to represent the vertical reference position.
8. From the 15 degree position, rotate the bulb socket clockwise to a
locked position.
9. Tuck the 2 lead wires into the lamp housing to assure that they are
not pinched when installing the protective rubber cap.
10. Install the protective rubber cap to the housing circular ring by
pushing and pressing it forward.
11. Re-apply pressure around the complete circular ring on the housing
to make sure the protective rubber cap is completely seated.
12. Reconnect washer bottle filler neck snap strap by reversing step 3
13. Reinstall the air tube to the air filter assembly (driver side only).
14. Reinstall the vertical shield to the bolster (driver side only).
15. Turn the headlamps on and make sure they work properly. If the
headlamp was correctly aligned before you changed the bulb, you should
not need to align it again.
44
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Lights
Lowbeam bulb replacement
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is in the O (OFF) position, then open
the hood.
2. Remove screw from oval splash
shield access panel in the exterior
wheel well area. Lift up and
rearward to release a hidden finger
attachment at the lower portion of
the panel (passenger side only).
3. From the exterior wheel well area
reach arm through splash shield
opening to access bulb socket
4. Remove the protective rubber cap
from the housing by grabbing it and
pulling rearward.
assembly.
6. Let go of the bulb socket and
leave it dangling near the lamp
housing (passenger side only).
7. Reach over the front bolster in the engine area and, with a tool if
necessary, bring the bulb socket upwards into an unobstructed area to
replace the bulb (passenger side only).
8. Disconnect the electrical
connector from the bulb socket and
discard the old bulb socket.
9. Connect the new bulb socket to
the electrical connector.
45
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Lights
Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep out of

children’s reach. Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base and do
not touch the glass. The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to
break the next time the headlamps are operated.
10. After the new bulb is installed, carefully let the bulb socket dangle
downward near the lamp housing (passenger side only).
11. From the exterior wheel well area, reach arm through splash shield
opening to install bulb socket with new bulb (passenger side only).
12. Install the new bulb socket into the lamp assembly by aligning the
indexing fingers, then rotate clockwise to locked position.
13. Install the protective rubber cap to the housing circular ring by
pushing and pressing it forward.
14. Re-apply pressure around the complete circular ring on the housing
to make sure the protective rubber cap is completely seated.
15. Reinstall the air tube to the air filter assembly (driver side only).
16. Reinstall the vertical shield to the bolster (driver side only).
17. Turn the headlamps on and make sure they work properly. If the
headlamp was correctly aligned before you changed the bulb, you should
not need to align it again
Replacing HID headlamp bulbs (if equipped)
The low beam headlamps on your vehicle use a “high intensity discharge”
source. These lamps operate at a high voltage. When the bulb is burned
out, the bulb and starter capsule assembly must be replaced by your
authorized dealer.
Replacing redundant park bulbs
1. Make sure headlamp switch is in the O (Off) position, then open the
hood.
46
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Lights
2. Remove screw from oval splash
shield access panel from the
exterior wheel well area. Lift up and
rearward to release a hidden finger
attachment at the lower portion of
the panel.
3. From the exterior wheel well area
reach arm through splash shield
opening to access bulb socket.

pulling it out of the lamp assembly.
5. Let go of the bulb socket and
leave it dangling near the lamp
housing.
6. Reach over the front bolster in
the engine area and, with a tool if
necessary, bring the bulb socket
upwards into an unobstructed area to replace the bulb.
7. Carefully pull bulb straight out of
socket and push in the new one.
8. After the new bulb is installed,
carefully let the bulb socket dangle
downward near the lamp housing.
9. From the exterior wheel well
area, reach arm through splash
shield opening to install bulb socket
with new bulb.
10. Install the new bulb socket into the lamp assembly by aligning the
indexing fingers, then rotate clockwise to the locked position.
11. Reinstall splash shield with screw.
12. Reinstall air tube to the air filter assembly (driver side only).
Replacing primary park/turn signal bulbs
1. Make sure headlamp switch is in the O (Off) position, then open the
hood.
2. Reach over the front bolster.
47
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Lights
3. Disengage top of flexible washer
bottle filler neck from snap strap
attachment and position it to gain
access to the high beam bulb

assembly.
5. Discard the old bulb and install

the new bulb into bulb socket.
6. Install the new bulb socket into
the lamp assembly by aligning the
indexing fingers, then rotate
clockwise to locked position.
7. If required, position the flexible
washer bottle filler neck back to its
original position and connect the snap strap (passenger side only).
8. If required, reinstall the air tube to the air filter assembly (driver side
only).
Replacing stop/tail/turn and side marker bulbs
Your vehicle is equipped with a rear lamp that has a stop/tail/turn and
side marker lamp module containing integral multiple light emitting
diodes (LED). If one or more LEDs burn out, the complete lamp module
has to be replaced. See your authorized dealer for the replacement LED
module.
Replacing rear turn signal bulbs
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is in the O (Off) position and open
the trunk.
48
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Lights
2. Lift out trunk floor carpeting panel to access a luggage scuff plate
(hard molding) shingles and a trunk side panel (dark grey, soft
wheelhouse side trim panel) at the lamp area.
3. Carefully pull/push the trunk side panel (dark grey, soft wheelhouse
side trim panel) outboard to expose the lamp assembly. The most
effective point to grasp the trunk side panel when pulling it out from the
luggage scuff plate is at it’s bottom edge where that edge meets the
exposed sheet metal of the trunk floor.
Note: Do not allow the trunk side panel to remain bent and untucked
from the luggage scuff plate (hard molding) for a long period of time.
Doing so may result in permanent deformation.
5. Pull the bulb from the socket and
push in the new bulb.
6. Install the bulb socket into the
lamp assembly by rotating it
clockwise.
7. Carefully push the trunk side
panel (dark grey, soft wheelhouse
side trim panel) back to the shingle position to the luggage scuff plate
(hard molding).
8. Install trunk floor carpeting panel.
Replacing backup lamp/redundant tail lamp bulbs
The backup lamp and redundant tail lamp bulbs are located in the trunk
lid. Follow the same steps to replace either bulb.
1. Make sure headlamp switch is in
the O (Off) position and open trunk
to access the lamp assembly.
2. Position the decklid trim aside by
removing 3 to 4 pin-type retainers
to expose the lamp assembly.
49
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Lights
4. Pull the bulb from the socket and
push in the new bulb.
5. Install the bulb socket into the
lamp assembly by rotating it
clockwise.
6. Carefully reposition the trim back
to its original position and secure
the retainers.
Replacing high-mount brake lamp bulb
1. Make sure the ignition control is
in the LOCK (OFF) position.
2. Open the trunk and reach
underneath package tray to locate
lamp assembly.
4. Pull the bulb straight from the
socket and push in the new bulb.
5. Install the bulb socket into the lamp assembly by rotating it clockwise.
Replacing license plate lamp bulbs
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is
in the O (Off) position.
2. Remove the two screws from the
license plate lamp assembly.
3. Remove bulb socket by turning
counterclockwise.
4. Carefully pull the bulb out from
the socket.
Install new bulb(s) in reverse order.
50
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Lights
Replacing fog lamp bulbs
1. Make sure the fog lamp switch is
in the O (Off) position.
2. From underneath the vehicle,
partially remove the tire splash
shield by removing four drive
screws.
After removing to allow free access
to the front fog lamp bulb and
electrical wire harness, the splash shield flap can be repositioned.
3. Rotate the harness/bulb assembly
counterclockwise to remove from
the fog lamp.
4. Carefully disconnect the bulb
from the harness assembly via the
two snap clips.
Install the new bulb in reverse order.
51
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
MULTI-FUNCTION LEVER
Windshield wiper: Rotate the end
of the control away from you to
increase the speed of the wipers;
rotate towards you to decrease the
speed of the wipers.
Speed dependent wipers: When the wiper control is set on the

intermittent settings, the speed of the wipers will automatically adjust
with the vehicle speed. The faster your vehicle is travelling the faster the
wipers will go.
Windshield washer: Push the end
of the stalk:
• briefly: causes a single swipe of
the wipers without washer fluid.
• a quick push and hold: the wipers
will swipe three times with
washer fluid.
• a long push and hold: the wipers
and washer fluid will be activated
for up to ten seconds.
Courtesy wipe feature: One extra wipe will happen a few seconds
after washing the front window to clear any water that is dripping down
from the top of the windshield caused by the washing.
Note: Do not operate the washer when the washer reservoir is empty.
This may cause the washer pump to overheat. Check the washer fluid
level frequently. Do not operate the wipers when the windshield is dry.
This may scratch the glass, damage the wiper blades and cause the wiper
motor to burn out. Before operating the wiper on a dry windshield,
always use the windshield washer. In freezing weather, be sure the wiper
blades are not frozen to the windshield before operating the wipers.
Windshield wiper features (if equipped with Autolamp feature)
The exterior lamps will turn on with the ignition on, headlamp control in
the Autolamp position and the windshield wipers are turned on (for a
fixed period of time).
52
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
TILT/TELESCOPE STEERING WHEEL
To adjust the steering wheel:
1. Pull the lever down to unlock the
steering column.
2. While the lever is in the down
position, move the steering wheel
up or down and in or out until you
find the desired position.
3. While holding the steering wheel
in place, pull the lever up to its
original position to lock the steering
column.
Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving.
ILLUMINATED VISOR MIRROR

Lift the mirror cover to turn on the
visor mirror lamps.
Slide on rod feature

Rotate the visor towards the side
window and extend it rearward for
additional sunlight coverage.
Note: To stow the visor back into
the headliner, visor must be
retracted before moving it back
towards the windshield.
53
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
The appearance of your vehicle’s overhead console will vary according to
your option package.
Storage compartment
Press on the rear edge of the
compartment door to open.
The storage compartment may be
used to secure sunglasses or a
similar object.
CENTER CONSOLE
Your vehicle may be equipped with a variety of console features. These
include:
1. Cupholders
2 3
2. Sliding arm rest
Note: Slide the arm rest to the 1
rearward position to open the utility
compartment
3. Utility compartment with power
point, a removable tray and coin
holder inside
Use only soft cups in the cupholder. Hard objects can injure you
in a collision.
54
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
CLOCK
Press the right (+) control to move
the time display forwards.
Press the left (-) control to move
the time display backwards.
AUXILIARY POWER POINT (12VDC)

Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert
any other object in the power outlet as this will damage the
outlet and blow the fuse. Do not hang any type of accessory or
accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the power
outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty.
The auxiliary power point is located in the center console utility
compartment.
Do not use the power point for operating the cigarette lighter element (if
equipped).
To prevent the fuse from being blown, do not use the power point(s)
over the vehicle capacity of 12 VDC/180W. If the power point or cigar
lighter socket is not working, a fuse may have blown. Refer to Fuses and
relays in the Roadside Emergencies chapter for information on
checking and replacing fuses.
To have full capacity usage of your power point, the engine is required to
be running to avoid unintentional discharge of the battery. To prevent
the battery from being discharged:
• do not use the power point longer than necessary when the engine is
not running,
• do not leave battery chargers, video game adapters, computers and
other devices plugged in overnight or when the vehicle is parked for
extended periods.
Always keep the power point caps closed when not being used.
55
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Cigar/Cigarette lighter
(if equipped)
Do not plug optional electrical
accessories into the cigarette lighter
socket. Push the door to access the
lighter.
Do not hold the lighter in with your
hand while it is heating, this will
damage the lighter element and socket. The lighter will be released from
its heating position when it is ready to be used.
Improper use of the lighter can cause damage not covered by your
warranty.
POWER WINDOWS
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and do not let
children play with the power windows. They may seriously injure
themselves.
When closing the power windows, you should verify they are free
of obstructions and ensure that children and/or pets are not in
the proximity of the window openings.
Press and pull the switches to open

and close windows.
• Push down (to the first detent)
and hold the switch to open.
• Pull up (to the first detent) and
hold the switch to close.
Rear Window Buffeting: When one or both of the rear windows are
open, the vehicle may demonstrate a wind throb or buffeting noise. This
noise can be alleviated by lowering a front window approximately two to
three inches.
56
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Express down (One Touch Down, Front windows only)
Allows the driver and passenger’s
window to open fully without
holding the control down. Push the
switch completely down to the AUTO AUTO
second detent and release quickly.
The window will open fully.
Momentarily press the switch to any
position to stop the window
operation.
Express Up (One Touch Up, Front windows only)
Allows the driver and passenger’s
window to close fully without
holding the control up. Pull the
switch completely up to the second
detent and release quickly. The
window will close fully. Momentarily
press the switch to any position to
stop the window operation
Note: Refer to the Locks and Security chapter for the Opening front
windows and moon roof feature.
Bounce-Back
When an obstacle has been detected in the window opening as the
window is moving upward, the window will automatically reverse
direction and move down. This is known as “bounce-back”. If the ignition
is turned OFF (without accessory delay being active) during
bounce-back, the window will move down until the bounce back position
is reached.
Security Override
If during a bounce-back condition, the switch is released to the neutral
position, then held in the one touch up position within two seconds after
the window reaches the bounce-back position, the window will travel
up with no bounce-back protection. If the switch is released before
the window reaches fully closed or the ignition is turned OFF (without
accessory delay being active), the window will stop. Security override
can be used if the window movement is restricted in some way, for
example, if there is ice on the window or seals.
57
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Window lock
The window lock feature allows only
the driver and front passenger to
operate the power windows.
To lock out all the window controls
(except for the driver and front
passenger) press the right side of
the control. Press the left side to
restore the window controls.
Accessory delay
With accessory delay, the window switches, audio system, and moonroof
(if equipped) may be used for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch
is turned to the 1 (LOCK) (OFF) position or until either front door is
opened.
INTERIOR MIRROR
The interior rear view mirror has two pivot points on the support arm
which lets you adjust the mirror UP or DOWN and from SIDE to SIDE.
Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in motion.
Automatic dimming interior rear view mirror

Your vehicle is equipped with an interior rear view mirror that has an
auto-dimming function. The electronic day/night mirror will change from
the normal (high reflective) state to the non-glare (darkened) state
when bright lights (glare) reach the mirror. When the mirror detects
bright light from behind the vehicle, it will automatically adjust (darken)
to minimize glare.
Without voice activated
Navigation System or SYNC
58
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
With voice activated Navigation
System or SYNC
The mirror will automatically return to the normal state whenever the
vehicle is placed in R (Reverse) to ensure a bright clear view when
backing up.
Do not block the sensors on the front and back of the interior
rear view mirror since this may impair proper mirror
performance.
Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh
abrasives, fuel or other petroleum-based cleaning products.
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Power side view mirrors

Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in motion.
To adjust your mirrors:

1. Rotate the control clockwise to
adjust the right mirror and rotate
the control counterclockwise to
adjust the left mirror.
2. Move the control in the direction
you wish to tilt the mirror.
3. Return to the center position to lock mirrors in place.
Memory feature
The power side view mirror positions are saved when doing a memory
set function and can be recalled along with the vehicle personality
features when a memory position is selected through the remote entry
transmitter, keyless entry keypad or memory switch on the driver’s door.
Refer to Memory seats/steering column/mirrors in the Seating and
Safety Restraints chapter.
59
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Heated mirrors
Both mirrors are heated
automatically to remove ice, mist
and fog when the rear window
defrost is activated.
Do not remove ice from the
mirrors with a scraper or
attempt to readjust the mirror
glass if it is frozen in place.
These actions could cause damage to the glass and mirrors.
SPEED CONTROL
With speed control set, you can maintain a set speed without keeping
your foot on the accelerator pedal.
Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on roads that
are winding, slippery or unpaved.
Setting speed control

The controls for using your speed
control are located on the steering
wheel for your convenience.
1. Press the ON control and release
it.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed.
3. Press the SET + control and

release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
5. The indicator light on the
instrument cluster will turn on.
60
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Note:
• Vehicle speed may vary momentarily when driving up and down a
steep hill.
• If the vehicle speed increases above the set speed on a downhill, you
may want to apply the brakes to reduce the speed.
• If the vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below
your set speed on an uphill, your speed control will disengage.
Disengaging speed control
To disengage the speed control:
• Depress the brake pedal.
Disengaging the speed control will not erase previous set speed.
Resuming a set speed
Press the RESUME control and
release it. This will automatically
return the vehicle to the previously
set speed.
Increasing speed while using speed control

There are two ways to set a higher
speed:
• Press and hold the SET + control
until you get to the desired
speed, then release the control.
You can also use the SET +
control to operate the Tap-Up
function. Press and release this
control to increase the vehicle set
speed in small amounts by 1 mph
(1.6 km/h).
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the desired speed. When the
vehicle reaches that speed press and release the SET + control.
61
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Reducing speed while using speed control
There are two ways to reduce a set
speed:
• Press and hold the SET - control
until you get to the desired
speed, then release the control.
You can also use the SET -
control to operate the Tap-Down
function. Press and release this
control to decrease the vehicle
set speed in small amounts by 1
mph (1.6 km/h).
• Depress the brake pedal until the desired vehicle speed is reached and
press the SET + control.
Turning off speed control

There are two ways to turn off the speed control:
• Depress the brake pedal. This will
not erase your vehicle’s
previously set speed.
• Press the speed control OFF
control.
Note: When you turn off the speed
control or the ignition, your speed
control set speed memory is erased.
STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS

their vehicle. Only use steering wheel controls and other devices not
essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so.
62
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Radio control features
Press MEDIA to select:
• AM, FM1, FM2, or CD
• SAT1, SAT2 or SAT3 (Satellite
Radio mode if equipped).
• LINE IN (Auxiliary input jack)
In Radio mode:
• Press to access the
next/previous preset station.
In CD mode:
• Press to listen to the
next track on the disc.
In Satellite radio mode (if
equipped):
• Press to advance through preset channels.
In any mode:
• Press VOL + or - to adjust the
volume.
63
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Navigation system hands free
control features (if equipped)
Press and hold control briefly
until the voice icon appears on
the Navigation display to use the
voice command feature.
Press to complete a voice
command.
For further information on the
Navigation system, refer to the Navigation supplement.
SYNC system hands free control
feature (if equipped)
Press briefly to use the voice
command feature. You will hear a
tone and LISTENING will appear in
the radio display. Press and
hold to exit voice command.
Press to activate phone mode or
answer a phone call. Press and
hold to end call or exit phone
mode.
Press to scroll through various menus and selections. Press
OK to confirm your selection.
For further information on the SYNC system, refer to the SYNC
supplement.
Navigation system/SYNC hands
free control features (if
equipped)
Press control briefly until the
voice icon appears on the
Navigation display to use the voice
command feature.
Press to activate phone mode or
answer a phone call. Press and
hold to exit phone mode or end
call.
64
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
For further information on the Navigation system/SYNC system, refer to
the Navigation and SYNC supplements.
MOON ROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
You can move the glass panel of the moon roof back to open or tilt up
(from the closed position) to ventilate the vehicle.
Do not let children play with the moon roof or leave children
unattended in the vehicle. They may seriously hurt themselves.
To open the moon roof:

The moon roof is equipped with an
automatic, one-touch, express
opening, closing and venting feature.
Press and release the rear portion of
the control. To stop motion at any
time during the one-touch
operation, press the control a
second time.
When closing the moon roof, you should verify that it is free of
obstructions and ensure that children and/or pets are not in the
proximity of the moon roof opening.
To close the moon roof:

The moon roof is equipped with an automatic, one-touch, express closing
feature. Press and release the front portion of the control. To stop
motion at any time during the one-touch closing, press the control again.
Bounce back:
When an obstacle has been detected in the moon roof opening as the
moon roof is closing, the moon roof will automatically open and stop at a
prescribed position. This is known as “bounce-back”. If the ignition is
turned OFF (without accessory delay being active) during bounce-back,
the moon roof will move until the bounce back position is reached.
Bounce back override:
To override bounce back, press and hold the front portion of the control.
For example: Bounce back can be used to overcome the resistance of ice
on the moon roof or seals. If during a bounce-back condition, the control
is released to the neutral position, then held in the one touch position
65
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
within two seconds after the moon roof reaches the bounce-back
position, the moon roof will travel with no bounce-back protection.
If the control is released before the moon roof reaches fully closed or the
ignition is turned OFF (without accessory delay being active), the moon
roof will stop. Security override can be used if the moon roof movement
is restricted in some way, for example, if there is ice on the moon roof or
seals.
To vent:
• To tilt the moon roof into the vent position (when the glass panel is
closed), press and release the front portion of the control.
• To close the moon roof from the vent position, press and hold the rear
portion of the control until the glass panel stops moving.
The moon roof has a sliding shade that can be opened or closed when
the glass panel is shut. To close the shade, pull it toward the front of the
vehicle
Accessory delay:
With accessory delay, the window switches, audio system, and moon roof
(if equipped) may be used for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch
is turned to the 1 (LOCK) (OFF) position or until any door is opened
HOMELINK姞 WIRELESS CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The HomeLink威 Wireless Control
System, located on the driver’s visor,
provides a convenient way to
replace up to three hand-held
transmitters with a single built-in
device. This feature will learn the
radio frequency codes of most
transmitters to operate garage
doors, entry gate operators, security systems, entry door locks, and
home or office lighting.
When programming your HomeLink威 Wireless Control System to
a garage door or gate, be sure that people and objects are out of
the way to prevent potential injury or damage.
Do not use the HomeLink威 Wireless Control System with any garage
door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by
U.S. federal safety standards (this includes any garage door opener
model manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage door which cannot
66
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
detect an object, signaling the door to stop and reverse, does not meet
current U.S. federal safety standards. For more information, contact
HomeLink威 at: www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515.
Retain the original transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for
future programming procedures (i.e. new HomeLink威 equipped vehicle
purchase). It is also suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle, the
programmed Homelink威 buttons be erased for security purposes, refer to
Programming in this section.
Programming
Do not program HomeLink威 with the vehicle parked in the garage.
Note: Your vehicle may require the ignition switch to be turned to the
ACC position for programming and/or operation of the HomeLink威. It is
also recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held
transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink威 for quicker
training and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
1. Position the end of your
hand-held transmitter 1–3 inches
(2–8 cm) away from the HomeLink威
button you wish to program (located
on your visor) while keeping the
indicator light in view.
2. Simultaneously press and hold
both the chosen HomeLink威 and
hand-held transmitter buttons until the HomeLink威 indicator light
changes from a slow to a rapidly blinking light. Now you may release
both the HomeLink威 and hand-held transmitter buttons.
Note: Some entry gates and garage door openers may require you to
replace Step 2 with procedures noted in the “Gate Operator and
Canadian Programming” in this section for Canadian residents.
3. Firmly press, hold for five seconds and release the programmed
HomeLink威 button up to two separate times to activate the door. If the
door does not activate, press and hold the just-trained HomeLink威
button and observe the indicator light.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete
and your device should activate when the HomeLink威 button is pressed
and released.
• If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns
to a constant light continue with “Programming” Steps 4 through
6 to complete programming of a rolling code equipped device (most
commonly a garage door opener).
67
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
4. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit) in the garage,
locate the “learn” or “smart” button (usually near where the hanging
antenna wire is attached to the unit).
5. Firmly press and release the “learn” or “smart” button. (The name and
color of the button may vary by manufacturer.)
Note: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate Step 6.
6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for two seconds and
release the programmed HomeLink威 button. Repeat the
press/hold/release sequence again and, depending on the brand of the
garage door opener (or other rolling code equipped device), repeat this
sequence a third time to complete the programming.
HomeLink威 should now activate your rolling code equipped device. To
program additional HomeLink威 buttons begin with Step 1 in the
“Programming” section. For questions or comments, please contact
HomeLink威 at www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515.
Gate Operator & Canadian Programming

During programming, your
hand-held transmitter may
automatically stop transmitting —
not allowing enough time for
HomeLink威 to accept the signal
from the hand-held transmitter.
After completing Step 1 outlined in
the “Programming” section,
replace Step 2 with the following:
Note: If programming a garage door opener or gate operator, it is
advised to unplug the device during the “cycling” process to prevent
overheating.
• Continue to press and hold the HomeLink威 button (note Step 2 in the
“Programming” section) while you press and release — every two
seconds (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter until the frequency
signal has been accepted by the HomeLink威. The indicator light will
flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink威 accepts the radio
frequency signal.
• Proceed with Step 3 in the “Programming” section.
68
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Operating the HomeLink姞 Wireless Control System
To operate, simply press and release
the appropriate HomeLink威 button.
Activation will now occur for the
trained product (garage door, gate
operator, security system, entry
door lock, or home or office lighting
etc.). For convenience, the
hand-held transmitter of the device
may also be used at any time. In the event that there are still
programming difficulties, contact HomeLink威 at www.homelink.com or
1–800–355–3515.
Erasing HomeLink姞 buttons

To erase the three programmed
buttons (individual buttons cannot
be erased):
• Press and hold the two outer
HomeLink威 buttons until the
indicator light begins to
flash-after 20 seconds. Release
both buttons. Do not hold for
longer that 30 seconds.
HomeLink威 is now in the train (or
learning) mode and can be programmed at any time beginning with Step
1 in the “Programming” section.
Reprogramming a single HomeLink姞 button
To program a device to HomeLink威 using a HomeLink威 button previously
trained, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button. Do NOT release the
button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without
releasing the HomeLink威 button, follow Step 1 in the “Programming”
section.
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink威 at www.homelink.com
or 1–800–355–3515.
69
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
MESSAGE CENTER
With the ignition in the RUN
position, the message center,
located on your instrument cluster,
displays important vehicle
information through a constant
monitor of vehicle systems. You
may select display features on the message center for a display of status
preceded by a brief indicator chime. The system will also notify you of
potential vehicle problems with a display of system warnings followed by
a long indicator chime.
Selectable features
Reset
Press this control to select and reset
functions shown in the INFO menu
and SETUP menu.
Info menu
This control displays the following
control displays:
• Odometer
• Trip Odometer A or B
• Distance to Empty
• Average Fuel Economy
• Average Speed
• Trip Elapsed Drive Time 1 or 2
• Compass
Odometer/Trip odometer
Refer to Gauges in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
70
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Distance to empty (DTE)
Selecting this function from the
INFO menu estimates approximately
how far you can drive with the fuel
remaining in your tank under
normal driving conditions.
Remember to turn the ignition OFF
when refueling to allow this feature to correctly detect the added fuel.
The DTE function will display LOW FUEL LEVEL when you have
approximately 50 miles (80 km) to empty. If you RESET this warning
message, this display will return within 10 minutes.
DTE is calculated using a running average fuel economy, which is based
on your recent driving history of 500 miles (800 km). This value is not
the same as the average fuel economy display. The running average fuel
economy is reinitialized to a factory default value if the battery is
disconnected.
Average fuel economy (AFE)
Select this function from the INFO
menu to display your average fuel
economy in miles/gallon or
liters/100 km.
If you calculate your average fuel
economy by dividing 100 miles
traveled by gallons of fuel used (kilometers traveled by liters used), your
figure may be different than displayed for the following reasons:
• Your vehicle was not perfectly level during fill-up
• Differences in the automatic shut-off points on the fuel pumps at
service stations
• Variations in top-off procedure from one fill-up to another
• Rounding of the displayed values to the nearest 0.1 gallon (liter)
1. Drive the vehicle at least 5 miles (8 km) with the speed control
system engaged to display a stabilized average.
2. Record the highway fuel economy for future reference.
It is important to press the RESET control (press and hold RESET for 2
seconds in order to reset the function) after setting the speed control to
get accurate highway fuel economy readings.
For more information refer to Fuel Information in the Maintenance
and Specifications chapter.
71
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Average Speed
Select this function from the INFO menu to display AVERAGE SPEED
and press the RESET control (press and hold RESET for 2 Seconds in
order to reset the function). Your average speed from that point will be
displayed until RESET is pressed and held for two seconds again.
Trip elapsed drive time
Select this function from the INFO
menu to display a timer.
To operate the Trip Elapsed Drive
Time perform the following:
1. Press and release RESET in order
to start the timer.
2. Press and release RESET to pause the timer.
3. Press and hold RESET for 2 seconds in order to reset the timer.
Compass display
Select this function from the INFO menu. Press the INFO button
repeatedly until the Compass and Odometer are displayed. (Do not
select Trip, DTE, or AFE. The top of the message center must be blank).
The compass reading may be affected when you drive near large
buildings, bridges, power lines and powerful broadcast antenna. Magnetic
or metallic objects placed in, on or near the vehicle may also affect
compass accuracy.
Usually, when something affects the compass readings, the compass will
correct itself after a few days of operating your vehicle in normal
conditions. If the compass still appears to be inaccurate, a manual
calibration may be necessary. Refer to Compass zone/calibration
adjustment.
Most geographic areas (zones) have a magnetic north compass point that
varies slightly from the northerly direction on maps. This variation is four
degrees between adjacent zones and will become noticeable as the
vehicle crosses multiple zones. A correct zone setting will eliminate this
error. Refer to Compass zone/calibration adjustment.
Compass zone/calibration adjustment
Perform this adjustment in an open area free from steel structures and
high voltage lines.
For optimum calibration, turn off all electrical accessories (heater/air
conditioning, wipers, etc.) and make sure all vehicle doors are shut.
72
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
1. Turn ignition to the RUN position.
2. Start the engine.
3. Press the INFO button repeatedly until the Compass and Odometer
are displayed. (Do not select Trip, DTE, or AFE. The top of the message
center must be blank).
Note: If the compass displays ⬙CAL 000000.0 mi⬙ instead of heading
information, the compass will need to be calibrated. Slowly drive the
vehicle in a circle (less than 3 mph [5 km/h]) until the ⬙CAL⬙ indicator
changes to display compass heading. This may take up to 3 circles to
complete calibration.
4. Determine your magnetic zone by
referring to the zone map.
3 2 1 15
4 14
13
5
12
6 7 8 9 1011
5. Press and hold the RESET until

the message center display changes
to show the current zone setting.
6. Release the RESET control, then

slowly press RESET down again.
7. Press the SETUP control
repeatedly until the correct zone
setting for your geographic location
is displayed on the message center. To exit the zone setting mode press
and release the RESET control.
8. Press the RESET control to start
the compass calibration function.
73
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
9. Slowly drive the vehicle in a
circle (less than 3 mph [5 km/h])
until the CIRCLE SLOWLY TO
CALIBRATE indicator changes to
CALIBRATION COMPLETED. This
will take up to three circles to complete calibration.
10. The compass is now calibrated.
Setup menu
Press this control for the following
displays:
• System Check
• Units (English/Metric)
• Language
• Easy entry/exit seat
• Reverse sensing system (Park Assist)
System check
Selecting this function from the
SETUP menu causes the message
center to cycle through each of the
systems being monitored.
Pressing the RESET control cycles
the message center through each of the systems being monitored.
Some monitored systems show message only if a warning is present.
The sequence of the system check report is as follows:
1. DOORS CLOSED
2. ENGINE TEMPERATURE
3. OIL PRESSURE
4. BRAKE FLUID LEVEL
5. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (if equipped and warning is
present)
6. EXTERIOR LAMPS (if equipped)
7. REMOVE OBJECT NEAR PASSENGER SEAT (if warning is present)
8. PARKING AID (if equipped and warning is present)
9. FUEL LEVEL
10. DISTANCE TO EMPTY
74
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Units (English/Metric)
1. Select this function from the
SETUP menu for the current units
to be displayed.
2. Press the RESET control to
change from English to Metric.
Language
SETUP menu for the current
language to be displayed.
2. Pressing the RESET control

cycles the message center through
each of the language choices.
3. Press and hold the RESET

control to set the language choice.
Easy entry/exit seat

This feature automatically moves the drivers seat backwards for easy exit
from the vehicle.
1. To disable/enable the easy exit
seat feature, select this function
from the SETUP control for the
current display mode.
2. Press the RESET control to turn
the easy entry exit seat ON or OFF.
75
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Reverse Sensing System (Park assist)
This feature sounds a warning tone to warn the driver of obstacles near
the rear bumper, and functions only when R (Reverse) gear is selected.
SETUP menu to disable the reverse
sensing system feature.
2. Press the RESET control to turn
the rear park assist OFF. When R
(Reverse) gear is selected, PARK AID OFF will be displayed.
System warnings
System warnings alert you to possible problems or malfunctions in your
vehicle’s operating systems.
In the event of a multiple warning situation, the message center will
cycle the display to show all warnings by displaying each one for several
seconds.
The message center will display the last selected feature if there are no
more warning messages. This allows you to use the full functionality of
the message center after you acknowledge the warning by pressing the
RESET control and clearing the warning message.
Warning messages that have been reset are divided into three categories:
• They will not disappear until a condition is changed.
• They will reappear on the display ten minutes from the reset.
• They will not reappear until an ignition LOCK/OFF-ON cycle has been
completed.
76
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
This acts as a reminder that these warning conditions still exist within
the vehicle.
Warnings Status
Driver’s door ajar Warning cannot be reset (CLOSE
Passenger door ajar DOOR TO RESET) will be displayed
Left rear door ajar
Right rear door ajar
Park brake engaged RELEASE PARK BRAKE will be
displayed
Low fuel level Warning returns after 10 minutes
Check brake system
Check park aid Warning returns after the ignition key
Low brake fluid is turned from OFF to RUN
Low tire pressure
Tire pressure monitor fault
Tire pressure sensor fault
Trunk ajar
Clear objects by pass seat
Compass error
Lamp outage
Integrated key programming Maximum number of Integrated Keys
status exceeded
DRIVER DOOR AJAR. Displayed when the driver’s door is not
completely closed.
PASSENGER DOOR AJAR. Displayed when the passenger side door is
not completely closed.
REAR LEFT DOOR AJAR. Displayed when the rear left door is not
completely closed.
REAR RIGHT DOOR AJAR. Displayed when the rear right door is not
completely closed.
PARK BRAKE ENGAGED. Displayed when the park brake is engaged.
If the warning stays on after the park brake is off, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM. Displayed when the brake system needs
servicing. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact your
77
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
LOW BRAKE FLUID. Indicates the brake fluid level is low and the
brake system should be inspected immediately. Refer to Brake fluid
reservoir in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
CHECK PARK AID. Displayed when the transmission is in R (Reverse)
and the Reverse Sensing System (Park Aid) is disabled. Refer to Reverse
Sensing System (Park Aid) in this section to enable.
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE.Displayed when one or more tires on your
vehicle have low tire pressure. Refer to Inflating your tires in the Tires,
Wheels and Loading chapter.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR FAULT. Displayed when the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System is malfunctioning. If the warning stays on or
continues to come on, have the system inspected by your authorized
dealer.
TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR FAULT. Displayed when a tire pressure
sensor is malfunctioning, or your spare tire is in use. For more
information on how the system operates under these conditions, refer to
Tire pressure monitoring system in the Tires, Wheels and Loading
chapter. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, have the
system inspected by your authorized dealer.
TRUNK AJAR. Displayed when the trunk is not completely closed.
CLEAR OBJECTS BY PASS SEAT. Displayed when objects are by the
passenger seat. After the objects are moved away from the seat, if the
warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized
dealer.
COMPASS ERROR. Displayed when the compass is not operating
properly. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact your
CHECK LEFT OR RIGHT HEADLAMPS (if equipped). Displayed
when the headlamps are activated and at least one low beam is burned
out. This warning will not display for the optional HID low beam bulb.
Check the lamps as soon as possible and have the burned out lamp
replaced. Refer to Replacing headlamp bulbs in the Lights chapter.
78
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
CHECK LF OR RF TURN LAMPS. Displayed when the turn signals are
activated and at least one is burned out. Check the lamps as soon as
safely possible and have the burned out lamp replaced. Refer to
Replacing headlamp bulbs in the Lights chapter.
CHECK LR OR RR TURN LAMPS. Displayed when the rear turn
signals are activated and at least one is burned out. Check the lamps as
soon as safely possible and have the burned out lamp replaced. Refer to
Replacing headlamp bulbs in the Lights chapter.
INTEGRATED KEY PROGRAMMING STATUS. Displayed when an
attempt is made to program a fifth Integrated Key to the Remote Key
Entry System. For more information on Integrated Key, refer to Locks
and Security chapter in this manual.
INTERIOR TRUNK CONTROL
Press the remote trunk release
control on the instrument panel to
the left of the steering wheel.
79
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Locks and Security
KEYS
Your vehicle is equipped with two
Integrated Keyhead Transmitters
(IKTs). The IKT functions as both a
programmed ignition key that
operates all the locks and starts the
vehicle, and a remote keyless entry
transmitter.
Your IKTs are programmed to your vehicle; using a non-programmed key

will not permit your vehicle to start. If you lose your authorized dealer
supplied IKTs, replacement IKTs are available through your authorized
dealer. Standard SecuriLock™ keys without remote entry transmitter
functionality can also be purchased from your authorized dealer if
desired.
Always carry a spare key with you in case of an emergency.
For more information regarding programming replacement IKTs, refer to
the SecuriLock™ passive anti-theft system section later in this chapter.
Note: Your vehicle’s IKTs were
issued with an adhesive security
label on them that provides
important vehicle key cut
information. It is recommended that
you maintain the label in a safe
place for future reference, such as
the inside front cover of this
Owner’s Guide.
80
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Recommended handling of the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter
(IKT)
To avoid inadvertently activating the remote entry functions of your
vehicle, it is recommended that the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter
(IKT) be handled properly when starting and turning off your vehicle.
When inserting the IKT into the
ignition cylinder, place your thumb
on the center thumb rest of the IKT
and forefinger on the logo badge on
the opposite side.
To gain more leverage when rotating

the IKT in the ignition lock cylinder,
you can readjust the location of
your thumb to grasp the IKT on the
outer edge next to the control.
Likewise, when rotating the IKT to

the 1 (LOCK) position in the
ignition lock cylinder, the bottom
edge of the IKT adjacent to the
control can be utilized.
81
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Locks and Security
POWER DOOR LOCKS
• Press the control to unlock all
doors.
• Press the control to lock all
doors.
Smart locks
This feature attempts to help prevent you from locking yourself out of
the vehicle if your key is still in the ignition.
When you open one of the front doors and you lock the vehicle with the
power door lock control (on the driver or passenger door trim panel), all
the doors will lock, then all doors will automatically unlock reminding
you that your key is still in the ignition.
The vehicle can still be locked, with the key in the ignition, using the
manual lock control on the door, locking the driver’s door with a key, or
using the lock control on the remote entry transmitter portion of your
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter.
If both front doors are closed, the vehicle can be locked from any
method, regardless of whether the key is in the ignition or not.
Power door lock/unlock inhibit feature
As a theft deterrent, the power door lock controls and interior trunk
release control can be disabled 20 seconds after the ignition has been
turned to the 1 (LOCK) position and the vehicle is locked using any of
the following:
• Remote entry transmitter portion of your Integrated Keyhead
Transmitter,
• Keyless entry keypad, or
• Driver power door lock control (Note: The driver’s door must be
open, then closed).
The door lock controls are reenabled when any of the following occurs:
• Unlock using the keyless entry keypad,
• Unlock using the remote entry transmitter portion of your IKT,
• Opening any door from the interior of the vehicle, or
82
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Locks and Security
• Turning the key in the ignition to the 3 (RUN) position.
Note: This feature is configured off by default. This feature can be
turned on or off using the following procedure:
Before starting, ensure the ignition is in the 1 (LOCK) position and all
vehicle doors are closed. You must complete Steps 1–5 within 30 seconds
or the procedure will have to be repeated. If the procedure needs to be
repeated, wait a minimum of 30 seconds before beginning again.
1. Place the key in the ignition and turn the ignition to the 3 (RUN)
position.
2. Press the power door unlock control on the door panel three times.
3. Turn the ignition from the 3 (RUN) position to the 1 (LOCK) position.
5. Turn the ignition back to the 3 (RUN) position. The horn will chirp
one time to confirm programming mode has been entered and is active.
6. Press the power door lock control on the door panel two times within
five seconds. The horn will chirp one time to confirm the feature is off;
the horn will chirp one time and honk one time to confirm the feature is
on.
7. Turn the ignition from the 3 (RUN) position to the 1 (LOCK) position.
The horn will chirp one time to confirm the programming mode has been
exited.
Repeat the procedure to turn the feature on or off.
Autolock feature
The autolock feature will lock all the doors when:
• all the doors are closed,
• the ignition is in the 3 (RUN) position,
• you shift into any gear putting the vehicle in motion, and
• the vehicle attains a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h).
The autolock feature repeats when:
• any door is opened then closed while the ignition is in the 3 (RUN)
position and the vehicle speed is 9 mph (15 km/h) or lower, and
• the vehicle then attains a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h).
83
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Autounlock feature
The autounlock feature will unlock all the doors when:
• the ignition is in the 3 (RUN) position, all the doors are closed, and
the vehicle has been in motion at a speed greater than 12 mph
(20 km/h);
• the vehicle has then come to a stop and the ignition is turned to the 1
(LOCK) or 2 (ACC) position; and
• the driver door is opened within 10 minutes of the ignition being
transitioned to the 1 (LOCK) or 2 (ACC) position.
Note: The doors will not autounlock if the vehicle has been
electronically locked before the driver door is opened.
Deactivating/activating autolock feature
Your vehicle comes with the autolock features activated; there are three
methods to enable/disable this feature:
• Through your authorized dealer,
• by using a power door unlock/lock sequence, or
• using a keypad procedure.
Note: The autolock feature can be activated/deactivated independently
of the autounlock feature.
Power door unlock/lock procedure
1. Place the key in the ignition and
turn the ignition to the 3 (RUN)
position.
2. Press the power door unlock
control on the door panel three
times.
3. Turn the ignition from the 3
(RUN) position to the 1 (LOCK)
position.
84
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Locks and Security
6. To enable/disable the autolock feature, press the unlock control, then
press the lock control. The horn will chirp once if autolock was
deactivated or twice (one short and one long chirp) if autolock was
activated.
7. Turn the ignition to the 1 (LOCK) position. The horn will chirp once
to confirm the procedure is complete.
Keyless entry key pad procedure
1. Turn the ignition to the 1 (LOCK)
position.
2. Close all the doors.
3. Enter factory–set 5–digit entry
code.
4. Press and hold the 3 • 4. While holding the 3 • 4 press the 7 • 8.
5. Release the 7 • 8.
The user should receive a horn chirp to indicate the system has been
disabled or a chirp followed by a honk to indicate the system has been
enabled.
Deactivating/activating autounlock feature
Your vehicle comes with the autounlock features activated; there are
three methods to enable/disable this feature:
• Through your authorized dealer,
• by using a power door unlock/lock sequence, or
• using a keypad procedure.
Note: The autounlock feature can be activated/deactivated
independently of the autolock feature.
Power door unlock/lock procedure
85
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Locks and Security
position.
times.
position.
6. To enable/disable the autounlock feature, press the lock control, then
press the unlock control. The horn will chirp once if autounlock was
deactivated or twice (one short and one long chirp) if autounlock was
activated.
7. Turn the ignition to the 1 (LOCK) position. The horn will chirp once
to confirm the procedure is complete.
Keyless entry key pad procedure
1. Turn the ignition to the 1 (LOCK)
position.
2. Close all the doors.
3. Enter factory–set 5–digit entry
code.
4. Press and hold the 3 • 4. While holding the 3 • 4, press and release
the 7 • 8. While still holding the 3 • 4, press and release the 7 • 8 a
second time.
The user should receive a horn chirp to indicate the system has been
disabled or a chirp followed by a honk to indicate the system has been
enabled.
86
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Locks and Security
CHILDPROOF DOOR LOCKS
• When these locks are set, the
rear doors cannot be opened from
the inside.
• The rear doors can be opened
from the outside when the doors
are unlocked.
The childproof locks are located on
rear edge of each rear door and
must be set separately for each
door. Setting the lock for one door
will not automatically set the lock for both doors.
• Insert the key and turn to the lock position (key at an angle) to
engage the childproof locks.
• Insert the key and turn to the unlock position (key horizontal) to
disengage the childproof locks.
INTERIOR LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT RELEASE

Your vehicle is equipped with a mechanical interior luggage compartment
release handle that provides a means of escape for children and adults in
the event they become locked inside the luggage compartment.
Adults are advised to familiarize themselves with the operation and
location of the release handle.
87
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Locks and Security
To open the luggage compartment
door (lid) from within the luggage
compartment, pull the illuminated
“T” shaped handle and push up on
the trunk lid. The handle is
composed of a material that will
glow for hours in darkness following
brief exposure to ambient light.
The “T” shaped handle will be
located either on the luggage
compartment door (lid) or inside
the luggage compartment near the
tail lamps.
Keep vehicle doors and

luggage compartment
locked and keep keys and remote
transmitters out of a child’s reach.
Unsupervised children could lock
themselves in the trunk and risk
injury. Children should be taught
not to play in vehicles.
On hot days, the temperature in the trunk or vehicle interior can

rise very quickly. Exposure of people or animals to these high
temperatures for even a short time can cause death or serious
heat-related injuries, including brain damage. Small children are
particularly at risk.
REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM

The Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) complies with part 15 of the
FCC rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
88
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
The typical operating range for your IKT is approximately 33 feet (10
meters). A decrease in operating range could be caused by:
• weather conditions,
• nearby radio towers,
• structures around the vehicle, or
• other vehicles parked next to your vehicle.
The IKT allows you to:
• remotely unlock the vehicle
doors.
• remotely lock all the vehicle
doors.
• remotely open the trunk.
• activate the personal alarm.
• arm and disarm the perimeter
anti-theft system.
• operate the illuminated entry
feature.
The remote entry lock/unlock feature operates in any ignition position

except while the key is held in the 4 (START) position. The panic
feature operates with the key in the 1 (LOCK) position.
If there are problems with the remote entry system, make sure to take
ALL Integrated Keyhead Transmitters with you to the authorized
dealer in order to aid in troubleshooting the problem.
Unlocking the doors/two stage unlock
1. Press and release to unlock the driver’s door. Note: The interior
lamps will illuminate.
2. Press and release again within five seconds to unlock all the doors.
The remote entry system activates the illuminated entry feature; this
feature turns on the lamps for 25 seconds or until the ignition is turned
to the 3 (RUN) position.
89
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Locks and Security
The inside lights will not turn off if:
• they have been turned on using the dimmer control or
• any door is open.
The battery saver feature will turn off the interior lamps 30 minutes after
the ignition is turned to the 1 (LOCK) position.
Two stage unlocking may be disabled or re-enabled by simultaneously
pressing the and controls on the IKT for four seconds (disabling
two stage unlock allows all vehicle doors to unlock simultaneously). The
turn lamps will flash twice to indicate that two-stage unlock was enabled
or disabled.
Opening front windows and moonroof (if equipped)
Press and hold for more than two seconds in order to begin opening
the two front windows and moonroof (if equipped).
• The control can then be released and the windows and moonroof
will complete the opening operation. Note: If the moonroof is in the
vent range, the moonroof will move to full vent.
• If any other remote entry transmitter control is pressed during the
opening operation, both windows and moonroof movement will stop.
Note: The ignition must be in the 1 (LOCK) position and the accessory
delay feature must be not activated in order for this feature to operate.
Locking the doors
1. Press and release to lock all the doors. The turn lamps will flash.
2. Press and release again within three seconds to confirm that all
the doors are closed. Note: The doors will lock again, the horn will chirp
and the turn lamps will flash once if all the doors and trunk are closed.
Note: If any door or the trunk is not closed, or if the hood is not closed
in vehicles equipped with the perimeter alarm feature, the horn will
chirp twice and the lamps will not flash.
Car finder
Press twice within three seconds. The horn will chirp and the turn
lamps will flash. It is recommended that this method be used to locate
your vehicle, rather than using the panic alarm.
Sounding a panic alarm
Press to activate the alarm. The horn will sound and the turn lamps
will flash for a maximum of 3 minutes. Press again or turn the ignition to
the 3 (RUN) position to deactivate, or wait for the alarm to time out in 3
minutes.
90
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Note: The panic alarm will only operate when the ignition is in the 1
(LOCK) position.
Opening the trunk
Press twice within 3 seconds to open the trunk.
• Ensure that the trunk is closed and latched before driving your
vehicle. Failure to properly latch the trunk may cause objects to fall
out or block the driver’s rear view.
Memory seat feature
The Integrated Keyhead Transmitter allows you to recall the memory
seat/mirror feature.
Press to automatically move the seat/mirror to the desired memory
position. Note: The seat will not travel to their final position if the key is
not in the ignition and the easy entry feature is enabled.
Activating the memory feature
To activate this feature:
1. Position the seat and mirrors to the desired position.
2. Press the SET control on the
driver’s door panel.
3. Within 5 five seconds, press the
lock or unlock control on the
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter and
then press the 1 or 2 control on the
driver’s door panel which you would
like to associate with the seat and
Driver 1 or Driver 2 positions.
4. Repeat this procedure for another
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter if desired.
Deactivating the memory feature
To deactivate this feature:
1. Press the SET control on the driver’s door panel.
2. Within five seconds, press any control on the Integrated Keyhead
Transmitter which you would like to deactivate and then press the SET
control on the driver’s door panel again.
3. Repeat this procedure for another Integrated Keyhead Transmitter if
desired.
91
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Replacing the battery
The Integrated Keyhead Transmitter uses one coin type three-volt
lithium battery CR2032 or equivalent.
To replace the battery:
1. Twist a thin coin in the slot of the
IKT near the key ring in order to
remove the battery cover.
2. Do not wipe off any grease on the

battery terminals on the back
surface of the circuit board.
3. Remove the old battery. Note: Please refer to local regulations when
disposing of transmitter batteries.
4. Insert the new battery. Refer to the instructions inside the IKT for the
correct orientation of the battery. Press the battery down to ensure that
the battery is fully seated in the battery housing cavity.
5. Snap the battery cover back onto the key.
Note: Replacement of the battery will not cause the IKT to become
deprogrammed from your vehicle. The IKT should operate normally after
battery replacement.
Replacing lost Integrated Keyhead Transmitters (IKTs)
If you would like to have your Integrated Keyhead Transmitters
reprogrammed because you lost one, or would like to buy additional
IKTs, you can either reprogram them yourself, or take all IKTs to your
authorized dealer for reprogramming.
How to reprogram your Integrated Keyhead Transmitters (IKTs)
To program a new Integrated Keyhead Transmitter yourself, refer to
Programming spare keys in the SecuriLock™ passive anti-theft
section of this chapter. Note: At least two IKTs are required to perform
this procedure yourself.
92
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Illuminated entry
The interior lamps and puddle lamps (if equipped) illuminate when the
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter or the keyless entry system keypad is
used to unlock the door(s).
The illuminated entry system will turn off the interior lights if:
• the ignition is turned to the 3 (RUN) position, or
• the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter lock control is pressed, or
• the vehicle is locked using the keyless entry keypad, or
• after 25 seconds of illumination.
The inside lights will not turn off if:
• they have been turned on with the dimmer control, or
• any door is open.
Perimeter lamps illuminated entry
With the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter system, the following items will
illuminate when the (unlock) control on the transmitter is pressed:
• Fog lamps
• Park lamps
• Tail lamps
The lamps will automatically turn off:
• if the ignition switch is turned to the 3 (RUN) position, or
• the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter lock control is pressed, or
• the vehicle is locked using the keyless entry keypad, or
• after 25 seconds of illumination.
Note: On some vehicles, the perimeter lamps illuminated entry feature
will not activate in daylight conditions.
Deactivating/activating perimeter lamps illuminated entry
You may enable/disable this feature by having your vehicle serviced by
your authorized dealer.
You may also perform the following power door lock sequence to
enable/disable the perimeter lamps feature. Note: Before starting, ensure
the ignition is in the 1 (LOCK) position and all vehicle doors are closed.
You must complete Steps 1–5 within 30 seconds or the procedure will
have to be repeated. If the procedure needs to be repeated, wait a
minimum of 30 seconds before beginning again.
93
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Locks and Security
position.
times.
position.
6. Press the power door unlock control twice within 5 seconds. Note:
The horn will chirp once to indicate the perimeter lighting feature has
been deactivated. The horn will chirp once and honk once (one short
and one long) to indicate the perimeter lighting feature has been
activated.
7. Turn the ignition to the 1 (LOCK) position to exit the procedure.
Note: The horn will chirp once to confirm the procedure is complete.
Illuminated exit
• When all vehicle doors are closed and the key is removed from the
ignition, the interior dome lamps (and the exterior mirror puddle
lamps, if equipped) will illuminate.
The lights will turn off if all the doors remain closed and
• 25 seconds elapse, or
• the key is inserted in the ignition.
Battery saver
The battery saver will shut off the interior lamps 30 minutes after the
ignition has been turned to the 1 (LOCK) position.
• If the dome lamps were turned on using the panel dimmer control, the
battery saver will shut them off 30 minutes after the ignition has been
turned to the 1 (LOCK) position.
• If the courtesy lamps were turned on because one of the vehicle doors
or the trunk was opened, the battery saver will shut off them off 10
minutes after the ignition has been turned to the 1 (LOCK) position.
• The battery saver will shut off the headlamps 10 minutes after the
ignition has been turned to the 1 (LOCK) position.
94
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Locks and Security
KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
You can use the keyless entry
keypad to:
• lock or unlock the doors without
using a key.
• open the trunk.
• recall memory seat/power mirrors positions (if equipped).
The keypad can be operated with the factory set 5–digit entry code; this
code is located on the owner’s wallet card in the glove box and is
available from your authorized dealer. You can also create up to three of
your own 5–digit personal entry codes.
When pressing the controls on the keypad, press the middle of the
controls to ensure a good activation.
Programming a personal entry code and keypad association to
memory seats and mirrors (if equipped)
To create your own personal entry code:
1. Enter the factory set code.
2. Within five seconds press the 1 • 2 on the keypad.
3. Enter your personal 5-digit code. Each number must be entered
within five seconds of each other.
4. To associate the entry code with a memory setting, enter a sixth digit
to indicate which driver should be set in a memory recalled by the
personal entry code:
• Pressing 1 • 2 recalls Driver 1 settings.
• Pressing 3 • 4 recalls Driver 2 settings.
• Pressing other keypad buttons or not pressing a keypad button as a
sixth digit does not set a driver and will not recall a memory setting.
Note: The factory-set code cannot be associated with a memory
setting.
5. The doors will lock then unlock to confirm that your personal keycode
has been programmed to the module.
Tips:
• Do not set a code that uses five of the same number.
• Do not use five numbers in sequential order.
• The factory set code will work even if you have set your own personal
code.
95
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Erasing personal code
1. Enter the factory set 5–digit code.
2. Within five seconds, press the 1 • 2 on the keypad and release.
3. Press and hold the 1 • 2 for two seconds. This must be done within
five seconds of completing Step 2.
All personal codes are now erased and only the factory set 5–digit code
will work.
Anti-scan feature
If the wrong code has been entered 7 times (35 consecutive button
presses), the keypad will go into an anti-scan mode. This mode disables
the keypad for one minute and the keypad lamp will flash.
The anti-scan feature will turn off after:
• one minute of keypad inactivity.
• pressing the UNLOCK control on the remote entry transmitter
portion of your Integrated Keyhead Transmitter.
• the ignition is turned to the 3 (RUN) position.
Unlocking and locking the doors using keyless entry
To unlock the driver’s door, enter the factory set 5-digit code or your
personal code. Each number must be pressed within five seconds of each
other. The interior lamps will illuminate. Note: If the two-stage unlocking
feature is disabled, all doors will unlock; for more information regarding
two-stage unlocking, refer to the Two stage unlocking section earlier in
this chapter.
To unlock all doors, enter the factory set code or your personal code,
then press the 3 • 4 control within five seconds.
To open the trunk, enter the factory set code or your personal code,
then press the 5 • 6 control within five seconds.
To lock all doors, press the 7 • 8 and the 9 • 0 at the same time (with
the driver’s door closed). You do not need to enter the keypad code
first.
SECURILOCK™ PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM
SecuriLock™ passive anti-theft system is an engine immobilization
system. This system is designed to help prevent the engine from being
started unless a coded Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT)
programmed to your vehicle is used. The use of the wrong type of
coded key may lead to a “no-start” condition.
96
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Your vehicle comes with two coded Integrated Keyhead Transmitters;
additional coded IKTs may be purchased from your authorized dealer.
Standard SecuriLock™ keys without remote entry transmitter
functionality can also be purchased from your authorized dealer if
desired. The authorized dealer can program your spare IKTs to your
vehicle or you can program the IKTs yourself. Refer to Programming
spare Integrated Keyhead Transmitters for instructions on how to
program the coded key.
Note: The SecuriLock™ passive anti-theft system is not compatible with
non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems. Use of these systems may
result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection.
Note: Large metallic objects, electronic devices that are used to
purchase gasoline or similar items, or a second coded key on the same
key chain may cause vehicle starting issues. You need to prevent these
objects from touching the coded IKT while starting the engine. These
objects will not cause damage to the coded IKT, but may cause a
momentary issue if they are too close to the IKT when starting the
engine. If a problem occurs, turn the ignition off, remove all objects on
the key chain away from the coded IKT and restart the engine.
Anti-theft indicator
The anti-theft indicator is located in the instrument panel cluster.
• When the ignition is in the 1
(LOCK) position, the indicator
will flash once every 2 seconds to
indicate the SecuriLock™ system
is functioning as a theft deterrent.
• When the ignition is in the 3 (RUN) position, the indicator will glow
for 3 seconds to indicate normal system functionality.
If a problem occurs with the SecuriLock™ system, the indicator will flash
rapidly or glow steadily when the ignition is in the 3 (RUN) position. If
this occurs, the vehicle will not start and should be taken to an
authorized dealer for service.
Automatic arming
The vehicle is armed immediately after switching the ignition to the 1
(LOCK) position.
97
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Locks and Security
The theft indicator will flash every
two seconds to act as a theft
deterrent when the vehicle is
armed.
Automatic disarming
The vehicle is disarmed immediately after the ignition is turned to the 3
(RUN) position.
The theft indicator will illuminate for three seconds and then go out. If
the theft indicator stays on for an extended period of time or flashes
rapidly, have the system serviced by your authorized dealer.
Replacement Integrated Keyless Transmitters (IKT) and coded keys
Note: Your vehicle comes equipped with two Integrated Keyhead
Transmitters (IKTs). The IKT functions as both a programmed ignition
key that operates all the locks and starts the vehicle, as well as a remote
keyless entry transmitter. A maximum of eight coded keys can be
programmed to your vehicle; only four of these eight keys can be IKTs
with remote entry functionality.
If your IKTs or standard SecuriLock™ coded keys are lost or stolen and
you don’t have an extra coded key, you will need to have your vehicle
towed to an authorized dealer. The key codes need to be erased from
your vehicle and new coded keys will need to be programmed.
Replacing coded keys can be very costly. Store an extra programmed key
away from the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent any
inconveniences. Please visit an authorized dealer to purchase additional
spare or replacement keys.
Programming spare keys
You can program your own Integrated Keyhead Transmitters or standard
SecuriLock™ coded keys to your vehicle. This procedure will program
both the engine immobilizer keycode and the remote entry transmitter
portion of the IKT to your vehicle. Note: A maximum of eight coded
keys can be programmed to your vehicle; only four of these eight can be
IKTs with remote entry functionality.
Tips:
• Only use Integrated Keyhead Transmitters (IKTs) or standard
SecuriLock™ keys.
• You must have two previously programmed coded keys (keys that
already operate your vehicle’s engine) and the new unprogrammed
key(s) readily accessible.
98
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Locks and Security
• If two previously programmed coded keys are not available, you must
take your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have the spare key(s)
programmed.
Please read and understand the
entire procedure before you begin.
1. Insert the first previously
programmed coded key into the
ignition.
2. Turn the ignition from the 1 (LOCK) position to the 3 (RUN) position.
Keep the ignition in the 3 (RUN) position for at least three seconds, but
no more than 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition to the 1 (LOCK) position and remove the first coded
key from the ignition.
4. Within ten seconds of turning the ignition to the 1 (LOCK) position,
insert the second previously coded key into the ignition.
Keep the ignition in the 3 (RUN) position for at least three seconds, but
no more than 10 seconds.
6. Turn the ignition to the 1 (LOCK) position and remove the second
previously programmed coded key from the ignition.
7. Within twenty seconds of turning the ignition to the 1 (LOCK)
position and removing the previously programmed coded key, insert the
new unprogrammed key (new key/valet key) into the ignition.
Keep the ignition in the 3 (RUN) position for at least six seconds.
9. Remove the newly programmed coded key from the ignition.
If the key has been successfully programmed it will start the vehicle’s
engine and will operate the remote entry system (if the new key is an
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter). The theft indicator light will illuminate
for three seconds and then go out to indicate successful programming.
If the key was not successfully programmed, it will not start your
vehicle’s engine and/or will not operate the remote entry features. The
theft indicator light may flash on and off. Wait 20 seconds and you may
repeat Steps 1 through 8. If failure repeats, bring your vehicle to your
authorized dealer to have the new key(s) programmed.
To program additional new unprogrammed key(s), wait twenty seconds
and then repeat this procedure from Step 1.
99
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Locks and Security
PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM
The perimeter anti-theft system will help protect your vehicle from
unauthorized entry.
If there is any potential perimeter anti-theft problem with your vehicle,
ensure ALL Integrated Keyhead Transmitters are brought to the
authorized dealer to aid in troubleshooting.
Arming the system
When armed, this system will respond if unauthorized entry is
attempted. When unauthorized entry occurs, the system will flash the
turn signal lamps and will sound the horn.
The system is ready to arm whenever the key is in the 1(LOCK)
position, or is removed from the ignition. Either of the following actions
will prearm the alarm system:
• Press the control on the remote entry transmitter portion of your
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter.
When you press the lock control twice within three seconds on the
remote entry transmitter portion of your IKT, the horn will chirp once
to let you know that all doors, the hood and the trunk are closed. If
any of these are not closed, the horn will chirp twice to warn you that
a door, the hood or the trunk is still open.
• Press the driver or passenger
interior door lock control while
the door is open, then close the
door.
• Press the 7 • 8 and 9 • 0

controls on the keyless entry pad
at the same time to lock the
doors (driver’s door must be
closed).
There is a 20 second countdown when any of the above actions occur
before the vehicle becomes armed.
Each door, the hood or the trunk is armed individually, and if any are
open, they must be closed for the system to enter the 20 second
countdown.
100
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Locks and Security
The turn signal lamps will flash once when all doors, the hood and the
trunk are closed indicating the vehicle is locked and entering the 20
second countdown.
Disarming the system
You can disarm the system by any of the following actions:
• Unlock the doors by using the remote entry transmitter portion of
your Integrated Keyhead Transmitter.
• Unlock the doors by using your keyless entry pad.
• Unlock the driver’s door with a key. Turn the key full rearward
(toward the rear of the vehicle) to ensure the alarm disarms.
• Turn ignition to the 3 (ON) position with a valid SecuriLock™ key.
• Press the panic control on the remote entry transmitter portion of
your IKT. This will only shut off the horn and turn lamps when the
alarm is sounding. The alarm system will still be armed.
Pressing the power door UNLOCK control within the 20 second
prearmed mode will return the vehicle to a disarmed state.
Triggering the anti-theft system
The armed system will be triggered if:
• Any door, the hood or the trunk is opened without using the door key,
keypad or the remote entry transmitter portion of your IKT.
• The ignition is turned to the 3 (ON) position with an invalid
SecuriLock™ key.
101
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
SEATING
Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the
seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe personal injuries in the
event of a collision.
Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to reduce the risk of
injury in a collision or sudden stop.
Before returning the seatback to its original position, make sure

that cargo or any objects are not trapped behind the seatback.
After returning the seatback to its original position, pull on the
seatback to ensure that it has fully latched. An unlatched seat may
become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or collision.
Adjustable head restraints

To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash, the
driver and passenger occupants should not sit in and/or operate
the vehicle, until the head restraint is placed in its proper position. The
driver should never adjust the head restraint while the vehicle is in
motion.
Head restraints help to limit head motion in the event of a rear collision.
Adjust your head restraint so that it is located directly or as close as
possible behind your head.
The head restraints can be moved
up by pulling up on the head
restraint.
102
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Push release button to lower head
restraint.
Adjusting the front power seat

Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the vehicle is
moving.
Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to reduce the risk of
injury in a collision or sudden stop.
Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap
belt snug and low across the hips.
Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the

seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe personal injuries in the
event of a collision.
Sitting improperly out of position or with the seat back reclined

too far can take off weight from the seat cushion and affect the
decision of the front passenger sensing system, resulting in serious
injury or death in a crash. Always sit upright against your seatback,
with your feet on the floor.
To reduce the risk of possible serious injury: Do not hang objects

off seat back or stow objects in the seatback map pocket (if
equipped) when a child is in the front passenger seat. Do not place
objects underneath the front passenger seat or between the seat and
the center console (if equipped). Check the “passenger airbag off” or
“pass airbag off” indicator lamp for proper airbag status. Refer to Front
passenger sensing system section for additional details. Failure to
follow these instructions may interfere with the front passenger seat
sensing system.
103
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
The control is located on the outboard side of the seat cushion.
Move the switch in the direction of
the arrows to raise or lower the
front portion of the seat cushion.
Move the switch in the direction of

the arrows to raise or lower the rear
portion of the seat cushion.
Press the switch in the direction of

the arrows to move the seat
forward, backward, up or down.
Power recline
Press the control to recline the
seatback forward or rearward.
104
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Using the power lumbar support
The power lumbar control is located on the outboard side of the seat.
Press one side of the control to
adjust firmness.
Press the other side of the control
to adjust softness.
Memory seat and mirrors

This system allows automatic
positioning of the driver seat and
outside rearview mirrors, to two
programmable positions.
The memory seat control is located
on the driver door.
• To program position one, move
the driver seat and exterior
mirrors to the desired positions
using the associated controls.
Press the SET control. The SET control light will briefly illuminate.
While the light is illuminated, press control 1.
• To program position two, repeat the previous procedure using control
2.
A position can only be recalled when the transmission gearshift is in Park
(automatic transmission). A memory seat position may be programmed
at any time.
The memory seat positions are also recalled when you press your remote
entry transmitter UNLOCK control and the transmitter is programmed to
a memory seat position or when you enter a valid customer code 1 or 2
on the keypad.
To program the memory seat to a remote entry transmitter, refer to
Remote entry system in the Locks and Security chapter.
Note: The seat will not travel to its final position if the key is not
in the ignition and the easy entry feature is enabled.
105
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Heated and cooled seats
Heated seats
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of
advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury,
medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions, must
exercise care when using the seat heater. The seat heater may cause
burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of
time. Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat,
such as a blanket or cushion, because this may cause the seat heater
to overheat. Do not puncture the seat with pins, needles, or other
pointed objects because this may damage the heating element which
may cause the seat heater to overheat. An overheated seat may cause
serious personal injury.
Note: Do not do the following:

• Place heavy objects on the seat
• Operate the seat heater if water or any other liquid is spilled on the
seat. Allow the seat to dry thoroughly.
The heated seats will only function when the engine is running.
To operate the heated seats:
Press once to activate the high heat
setting (3 indicator lights). Continue
pressing to scroll through the other
settings; medium heat (2 indicator
lights), low heat (1 indicator light) or off.
The heated seats will turn off after 15 minutes.
If the vehicle falls below 350 RPMs while the heated seats are on, the
feature will turn itself off and will need to be reactivated.
Cooled seats
The cooled seats will only function when the engine is running.
To operate the cooled seats:
Press once to activate the high cool
setting (3 indicator lights). Continue
pressing to scroll through the other
settings; medium cool (2 indicator
lights), low cool (1 indicator light) or off.
The cooled seats will turn off after 30 minutes.
106
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
If the engine falls below 350 RPMs while the cooled seats are on, the
feature will turn itself off and will need to be reactivated.
Climate controlled seats air filter replacement (if equipped)

The climate controlled seat system includes air filters that must be
replaced periodically. Refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide for
more information.
• There is a filter located under
each front seat.
• The filter can be accessed from the first row seat. Move the front
seats all the way back and up to ease access.
To remove an air filter:
1. Remove key from ignition.
2. Push up on the outside rigid edge
of the filter and rotate toward the
front of the vehicle once tabs are
released.
• Remove filter.
107
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
To install a filter:
• First, position the filter in it’s
housing making sure that the far
forward end is all the way up in
the housing. Then push in on the
center of the outside edge of the
filter and rotate up into the
housing until it clips into position.
REAR SEATS
Split-folding rear seatbacks

One or both rear seatbacks can be folded down to provide additional
cargo space.
To lower the seatback(s), pull the
release handle(s) located inside the
trunk.
108
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Fold the seatback(s) down.
Before returning the seatback to its original position, make sure

that cargo or any objects are not trapped behind the seatback.
After returning the seatback to its original position, pull on the
seatback to ensure that it has fully latched. An unlatched seat may
become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or collision.
Make sure that the safety belt for the rear center passenger is properly
routed over the rear seatback.
109
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Seat-mounted cup holders and armrest storage compartment
(if equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with
cup holders in the rear seat armrest.
To access the cup holders, fold the
armrest down.
Use only soft cups in the cup holder. Hard objects can injure you
in a collision.
SAFETY RESTRAINTS
Personal Safety System™
The Personal Safety System™ provides an improved overall level of
frontal crash protection to front seat occupants and is designed to help
further reduce the risk of airbag-related injuries. The system is able to
analyze different occupant conditions and crash severity before activating
the appropriate safety devices to help better protect a range of
occupants in a variety of frontal crash situations.
Your vehicle’s Personal Safety System™ consists of:
• Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints.
• Front outboard safety belts with pretensioners, energy management
retractors (first row only), and safety belt usage sensors.
• Driver’s seat position sensor.
• Front passenger sensing system
• “Passenger airbag off” or “pass airbag off” indicator lamp
• Front crash severity sensor.
• Restraints Control Module (RCM) with impact and safing sensors.
• Restraint system warning light and back-up tone.
• The electrical wiring for the airbags, crash sensor(s), safety belt
pretensioners, front safety belt usage sensors, driver seat position
sensor, front passenger sensing system, and indicator lights.
110
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
How does the Personal Safety System™ work?
The Personal Safety System™ can adapt the deployment strategy of your
vehicle’s safety devices according to crash severity and occupant
conditions. A collection of crash and occupant sensors provides
information to the Restraints Control Module (RCM). During a crash, the
RCM may activate the safety belt pretensioners and/or either one or both
stages of the dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints based on crash
severity and occupant conditions.
The fact that the pretensioners or airbags did not activate for both front
seat occupants in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with
the system. Rather, it means the Personal Safety System™ determined
the accident conditions (crash severity, belt usage, etc.) were not
appropriate to activate these safety devices. Front airbags are designed
to activate only in frontal and near-frontal collisions (not rollovers, side
impacts or rear impacts) unless the collision causes sufficient
longitudinal deceleration. The pretensioners are designed to activate in
frontal and near-frontal collisions, and in side collisions when the vehicle
is equipped with the side air curtain system.
Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints
The dual-stage airbags offer the capability to tailor the level of airbag
inflation energy. A lower, less forceful energy level is provided for more
common, moderate-severity impacts. A higher energy level is used for
the most severe impacts. Refer to Airbag supplemental restraints
section in this chapter.
Front crash severity sensor
The front crash severity sensor enhances the ability to detect the
severity of an impact. Positioned up front, it provides valuable
information early in the crash event on the severity of the impact. This
allows your Personal Safety System™ to distinguish between different
levels of crash severity and modify the deployment strategy of the
dual-stage airbags and safety belt pretensioners.
Driver’s seat position sensor
The driver’s seat position sensor allows your Personal Safety System™ to
tailor the deployment level of the driver dual-stage airbag based on seat
position. The system is designed to help protect smaller drivers sitting
close to the driver airbag by providing a lower airbag output level.
111
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Front passenger sensing system
For airbags to do their job they must inflate with great force, and this
force can pose a potentially deadly risk to occupants that are very close
to the airbag when it begins to inflate. For some occupants, this occurs
because they are initially sitting very close to the airbag. For other
occupants, this occurs when the occupant is not properly restrained by
safety belts or child safety seats and they move forward during pre-crash
braking. The most effective way to reduce the risk of unnecessary
injuries is to make sure all occupants are properly restrained. Accident
statistics suggest that children are much safer when properly restrained
in the rear seating positions than in the front.
Air bags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. NEVER place a
rear-facing child seat in front of an active air bag. If you must
use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the seat all the
way back.
Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back

seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints.
The front passenger sensing system can automatically turn off the front
passenger airbag and passenger seat-mounted side airbag. The system is
designed to help protect small (child size) occupants from frontal airbag
deployments when they are seated or restrained in the front passenger
seat contrary to proper child-seating or restraint usage
recommendations. Even with this technology, parents are STRONGLY
encouraged to always properly restrain children in the rear seat. The
sensor also turns off the passenger front airbag and passenger
seat-mounted side airbag (if equipped) when the passenger seat is empty
and the safety belt is unbuckled, or when a child or a small person
occupies the front passenger seat and the safety belt is unbuckled.
Front safety belt usage sensors
The front safety belt usage sensors detect whether or not the driver and
front outboard passenger safety belts are fastened. This information
allows your Personal Safety System™ to tailor the airbag deployment
and safety belt pretensioner activation depending upon safety belt usage.
Refer to Safety belt section in this chapter.
112
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Front safety belt pretensioners
The safety belt pretensioners at the front outboard seating positions are
designed to tighten the safety belts firmly against the occupant’s body
during frontal collisions, and in side collisions when the side curtains and
side airbags are activated. This helps increase the effectiveness of the
safety belts. In frontal collisions, the safety belt pretensioners can be
activated alone or, if the collision is of sufficient severity, together with
the front airbags.
Front safety belt energy management retractors
The front outboard safety belt energy management retractors allow
webbing to be pulled out of the retractor in a gradual and controlled
manner in response to the occupant’s forward momentum. This helps
reduce the risk of force-related injuries to the occupant’s chest by
limiting the load on the occupant. Refer to Energy management feature
section in this chapter.
Determining if the Personal Safety System™ is operational
The Personal Safety System™ uses a warning light in the instrument
cluster or a back-up tone to indicate the condition of the system. Refer
to the Warning light section in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
Routine maintenance of the Personal Safety System™ is not required.
The Restraints Control Module (RCM) monitors its own internal circuits
and the circuits for the airbag supplemental restraints, crash sensor(s),
safety belt pretensioners, front safety belt buckle sensors, driver seat
position sensor, and front passenger sensing system. In addition, the
RCM also monitors the restraints warning light in the instrument cluster.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following.
• The warning light will either flash or stay lit.
• The warning light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is
turned on.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and warning light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the Personal
Safety System™ serviced at an authorized dealer immediately. Unless
serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a
collision.
113
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Safety belt precautions
Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap
belt snug and low across the hips.
To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit where they
can be properly restrained.
Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the
vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from
injury in a collision.
All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always

properly wear their safety belts, even when an air bag
supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or

outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to
ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a
safety belt properly.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely

to die than a person wearing a seat belt.
Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific safety belt

assembly which is made up of one buckle and one tongue that
are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt on the
outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm. 2)
Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside shoulder.
3) Never use a single belt for more than one person.

114
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Combination lap and shoulder belts
1. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) until you hear a snap and feel
it latch. Make sure the tongue is
securely fastened in the buckle.
2. To unfasten, push the release

button and remove the tongue from
the buckle.
All restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder belts.
While you are fastened in the safety belt, the combination lap/shoulder
belt adjusts to your movement. However, if you brake hard, turn hard, or
if your vehicle receives an impact of 5 mph (8 km/h) or more, the safety
belt will become locked and help reduce your forward movement.
Energy management feature — front outboard
• This vehicle has a safety belt system with an energy management
feature at the front seats to help further reduce the risk of injury in
the event of a head-on collision.
• The energy management feature has a retractor assembly that is
designed to extend the safety belt webbing in a controlled manner.
This helps reduce the belt force acting on the user’s chest.
Failure to inspect and replace if necessary the Belt and
Retractor assembly after an accident could increase the risk of
115
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
All safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder
belts. All of the passenger combination lap and shoulder belts have two
types of locking modes described below:
Vehicle sensitive mode
This is the normal retractor mode, which allows free shoulder belt length
adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle
movement. For example, if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner
sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of approximately 5 mph
(8 km/h) or more, the combination safety belts will lock to help reduce
forward movement of the driver and passengers.
Automatic locking mode
How to use the automatic locking mode
• Buckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt.
• Grasp the shoulder portion and

pull downward until the entire
belt is pulled out.
• Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking
sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking
mode.
116
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
When to use the automatic locking mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The belt will
still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The automatic
locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt.
This mode should be used any time a child safety seat, except a
booster, is installed in passenger front or rear seating positions. Children
12 years old and under should be properly restrained in the rear seat
whenever possible. Refer to Safety restraints for children or Safety
seats for children later in this chapter.
How to disengage the automatic locking mode
Ford Motor Company recommends that all passenger safety belt
assemblies and attaching hardware should be inspected by an
authorized dealer after any collision to verify that the ⬙automatic
locking retractor⬙ feature for child seats is still working properly. Safety
belt assemblies should be inspected by an authorized dealer and must
be replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. Failure to
replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract

completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
Safety belt pretensioner

Your vehicle is equipped with safety belt pretensioners at the driver and
front outboard passenger seating positions.
The safety belt pretensioner tightens the safety belts firmly against the
occupant’s body at the start of the crash.
The driver and front passenger safety belt system (including
retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be replaced if the
vehicle is involved in a collision that results in deployment of front
airbags, seat-mounted side airbags and side air curtains, and safety belt
pretensioners.
117
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Safety belt height adjustment
Your vehicle has safety belt height
adjustments at the front outboard
seating positions. Adjust the height
of the shoulder belt so the belt rests
across the middle of your shoulder.
To adjust the shoulder belt height,
pull on the center button and slide
the height adjuster up or down.
Release the button and pull down
on the height adjuster to make sure
it is locked in place.
Position the safety belt height adjusters so that the belt rests
across the middle of your shoulder. Failure to adjust the safety
belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt and
increase the risk of injury in a collision.
Safety belt extension assembly

If the safety belt is too short when fully extended, there is a 8 inch (20
cm) safety belt extension assembly that can be added (part number
611C22). This assembly can be obtained from an authorized dealer.
Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety
belt. Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on
the label. Also, use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too
short for you when fully extended.
Do not use extensions to change the fit of the shoulder belt
across the torso.
Safety belt maintenance

Inspect the safety belt systems periodically to make sure they work
properly and are not damaged. Inspect the safety belts to make sure
there are no nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if necessary. All safety belt
assemblies, including retractors, buckles, front safety belt buckle
assemblies, buckle support assemblies (slide bar-if equipped), shoulder
belt height adjusters (if equipped), shoulder belt guide on seatback (if
equipped), child safety seat LATCH and tether anchors, and attaching
hardware, should be inspected after a collision. Ford Motor Company
118
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
recommends that all safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles involved in
a collision be replaced. However, if the collision was minor and an
authorized dealer finds that the belts do not show damage and continue
to operate properly, they do not need to be replaced. Safety belt
assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and
replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted.
Failure to inspect and if necessary replace the safety belt
assembly under the above conditions could result in severe
personal injuries in the event of a collision.
For proper care of soiled safety belts, refer to Interior in the Cleaning
chapter.
Safety belt warning light and indicator chime

The safety belt warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster and a
chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten their safety belts.
Conditions of operation
If... Then...
The driver’s safety belt is not The safety belt warning light
buckled before the ignition switch illuminates 1-2 minutes and the
is turned to the ON position... warning chime sounds 4-8
seconds.
The driver’s safety belt is buckled The safety belt warning light and
while the indicator light is warning chime turn off.
illuminated and the warning chime
is sounding...
The driver’s safety belt is buckled The safety belt warning light and
before the ignition switch is turned indicator chime remain off.
to the ON position...
Belt-Minder姞
The Belt-Minder威 feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt
warning function. This feature provides additional reminders by
intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning
light in the instrument cluster when the driver’s and front passenger’s
safety belt is unbuckled.
119
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
The Belt-Minder威 feature uses information from the front passenger
sensing system to determine if a front seat passenger is present and
therefore potentially in need of a warning. To avoid activating the
Belt-Minder威 feature for objects placed in the front passenger seat,
warnings will only be given to large front seat occupants as determined
by the front passenger sensing system.
Both the driver’s and passenger’s safety belt usages are monitored and
either may activate the Belt-Minder威 feature. The warnings are the same
for the driver and the front passenger. If the Belt-Minder威 warnings have
expired (warnings for approximately 5 minutes) for one occupant (driver
or front passenger), the other occupant can still activate the
Belt-Minder威 feature.
When the Belt-Minder威 feature is activated, the safety belt warning light
illuminates and the warning chime sounds for 6 seconds every 30 seconds,
repeating for approximately 5 minutes or until the safety belts are buckled.
The Belt-Minder威 feature uses two different warning chimes. During the
first minute of activation, the warning chime will sound once every
second. The remaining warning chimes will sound twice every second
while the system is activated.
If... Then...
The driver’s and front passenger’s The Belt-Minder威 feature will not
safety belts are buckled before the activate.
ignition switch is turned to the ON
position or less than 1-2 minutes
have elapsed since the ignition
switch has been turned ON...
The driver’s or front passenger’s The Belt-Minder威 feature is
safety belt is not buckled when the activated - the safety belt warning
vehicle has reached at least 3 mph light illuminates and the warning
(5 km/h) and 1-2 minutes have chime sounds for 6 seconds every
elapsed since the ignition switch 30 seconds, repeating for
has been turned to ON... approximately 5 minutes or until
the safety belts are buckled.
120
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
If... Then...
The driver’s or front passenger’s The Belt-Minder威 feature is
safety belt becomes unbuckled for activated - the safety belt warning
approximately 1 minute while the light illuminates and the warning
vehicle is traveling at least 3 mph chime sounds for 6 seconds every
(5 km/h) and more than 1-2 30 seconds, repeating for
minutes have elapsed since the approximately 5 minutes or until
ignition switch has been turned to the safety belts are buckled.
ON...
The following are reasons most often given for not wearing safety belts
(All statistics based on U.S. data):
Reasons given... Consider...
“Crashes are rare events” 36700 crashes occur every day. The
more we drive, the more we are
exposed to “rare” events, even for
good drivers. 1 in 4 of us will be
seriously injured in a crash during
our lifetime.
“I’m not going far” 3 of 4 fatal crashes occur within 25
miles (40 km) of home.
“Belts are uncomfortable” We design our safety belts to enhance
comfort. If you are uncomfortable -
try different positions for the safety
belt upper anchorage and seatback
which should be as upright as
possible; this can improve comfort.
“I was in a hurry” Prime time for an accident.
Belt-Minder威 reminds us to take a few
seconds to buckle up.
“Safety belts don’t work” Safety belts, when used properly,
reduce risk of death to front seat
occupants by 45% in cars, and by
60% in light trucks.
121
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Reasons given... Consider...

“Traffic is light” Nearly 1 of 2 deaths occur in
single-vehicle crashes, many when
no other vehicles are around.
“Belts wrinkle my clothes” Possibly, but a serious crash can do
much more than wrinkle your clothes,
particularly if you are unbelted.
“The people I’m with don’t Set the example, teen deaths occur 4
wear belts” times more often in vehicles with
TWO or MORE people. Children and
younger brothers/sisters imitate
behavior they see.
“I have an airbag” Airbags offer greater protection when
used with safety belts. Frontal airbags
are not designed to inflate in rear and
side crashes or rollovers.
“I’d rather be thrown clear” Not a good idea. People who are
ejected are 40 times more likely
to DIE. Safety belts help prevent
ejection, WE CAN’T “PICK OUR
CRASH”.
Do not sit on top of a buckled safety belt or insert a latchplate
into the buckle to avoid the Belt-Minder威 chime. To do so may
adversely affect the performance of the vehicle’s air bag system.
One-time disable
If at any time the driver/front passenger quickly buckles then unbuckles
the safety belt for that seating position, the Belt-Minder威 is disabled for
the current ignition cycle. The Belt-Minder威 feature will enable during
the same ignition cycle if the occupant buckles and remains buckled for
approximately 30 seconds. Confirmation is not given for the one time
disable.
Deactivating/activating the Belt-Minder姞 feature
The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder威 are
deactivated/activated independently. When deactivating/activating
one seating position, do not buckle the other position as this will
terminate the process.
122
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Read Steps 1 - 4 thoroughly before proceeding with the
deactivation/activation programming procedure.
Note: The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder威 features must be
disabled/enabled separately. Both cannot be disable/enabled during the
same key cycle.
The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder威 features can be
deactivated/activated by performing the following procedure:
Before following the procedure, make sure that:
• The parking brake is set
• The gearshift is in N (Neutral) (manual transmission)
• The gearshift is in P (Park) (automatic transmission)
• The ignition switch is in the OFF position
• The driver and front passenger safety belts are unbuckled
While the design allows you to deactivate your Belt-Minder威, this
system is designed to improve your chances of being safely
belted and surviving an accident. We recommend you leave the
Belt-Minder威 system activated for yourself and others who may use the
vehicle. To reduce the risk of injury, do not deactivate/activate the
Belt-Minder威 feature while driving the vehicle.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the RUN (or ON) position. DO NOT START
THE ENGINE.
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off (Approximately 1–2
minutes).
• Step 3 must be completed within 50 seconds after the safety belt
warning light turns off.
3. For the seating position being disabled, at a moderate speed, buckle
then unbuckle the safety belt nine times, ending in the unbuckled state.
Step 3 must be completed within 50 seconds after the safety belt
warning light turns off.
• After Step 3, the safety belt warning light will be turned on for three
seconds.
4. Within approximately seven seconds of the light turning off, buckle
then unbuckle the safety belt.
• This will disable the Belt-Minder威 feature for that seating position if it
is currently enabled. As confirmation, the safety belt warning light will
flash four times per second for three seconds.
123
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
• This will enable the Belt-Minder威 feature for that seating position if it
is currently disabled. As confirmation, the safety belt warning light will
flash four times per second for three seconds, followed by three
seconds with the light off, then followed by the safety belt warning
light flashing four times per second for three seconds again.
AIRBAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Important supplemental restraint system precautions

Airbags DO NOT inflate slowly or
gently and the risk of injury from a
deploying airbag is greatest close to
the trim covering the airbag module.

properly wear their safety belts, even when an air bag
supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.
124
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)

National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)

recommends a minimum distance of at least 10 inches (25 cm)
between an occupant’s chest and the driver airbag module.
Never place your arm over the airbag module as a deploying

airbag can result in serious arm fractures or other injuries.
Steps you can take to properly position yourself away from the airbag:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the
pedals comfortably.
• Recline the seat slightly (one or two degrees) from the upright
position.
Do not put anything on or over the airbag module. Placing
objects on or over the airbag inflation area may cause those
objects to be propelled by the airbag into your face and torso causing
serious injury.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the airbag

supplemental restraint system (SRS) or its fuses. See your
authorized dealer.
Modifying or adding equipment to the front end of the vehicle

(including frame, bumper, front end body structure and tow
hooks) may affect the performance of the airbag system, increasing the
risk of injury. Do not modify the front end of the vehicle.
125
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Children and airbags
Children must always be properly
restrained. Accident statistics
suggest that children are safer when
properly restrained in the rear
seating positions than in the front
seating position. Failure to follow
these instructions may increase the
risk of injury in a collision.
Airbags can kill or injure a
child in a child seat.
NEVER place a rear-facing child
seat in front of an active airbag. If
you must use a forward-facing
child seat in the front seat, move
the seat all the way back.
How does the safety belt pretensioner and airbag supplemental

restraint system work?
The safety belt pretensioner and
airbag SRS are designed to activate
when the vehicle sustains
longitudinal deceleration sufficient
to cause the sensors to close an
electrical circuit that initiates
pretensioner activation and airbag
inflation.
The fact that the pretensioners and
airbags did not activate in a collision
does not mean that something is
wrong with the system. Rather, it means the forces were not of the type
sufficient to cause activation. Front airbags are designed to activate in
frontal and near-frontal collisions, not rollover, side-impact, or
rear-impacts unless the collision causes sufficient longitudinal
deceleration.
126
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
The airbags inflate and deflate
rapidly upon activation. After airbag
deployment, it is normal to notice a
smoke-like, powdery residue or
smell the burnt propellant. This may
consist of cornstarch, talcum
powder (to lubricate the bag) or
sodium compounds (e.g., baking
soda) that result from the
combustion process that inflates the
airbag. Small amounts of sodium
hydroxide may be present which
may irritate the skin and eyes, but
none of the residue is toxic.
While the system is designed to help
reduce serious injuries, contact with
a deploying airbag may also cause abrasions, swelling or temporary
hearing loss. Because airbags must inflate rapidly and with considerable
force, there is the risk of death or serious injuries such as fractures,
facial and eye injuries or internal injuries, particularly to occupants who
are not properly restrained or are otherwise out of position at the time
of airbag deployment. Thus, it is extremely important that occupants be
properly restrained as far away from the airbag module as possible while
maintaining vehicle control.
Several air bag system components get hot after inflation. Do not
touch them after inflation.
If the air bag has deployed, the air bag will not function
again and must be replaced immediately. If the air bag is not
replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a
collision.
The SRS consists of:

• driver and passenger airbag modules (which include the inflators and
airbags)
• seat-mounted side airbags. Refer to Seat-mounted side airbag system
later in this chapter
• safety belt pretensioners
• one or more impact and safing sensors
127
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
• a readiness light and tone
• and the electrical wiring which connects the components
• Side curtain airbag system. Refer to Side curtain airbag system later
in this chapter.
• Front passenger sensing system. Refer to Front passenger sensing
system later in this chapter.
• “Passenger airbag off” or “pass airbag off” indicator lamp. Refer to
Front passenger sensing system later in this chapter.
The diagnostic module monitors its own internal circuits and the
supplemental airbag electrical system wiring (including the impact
sensors), the system wiring, the airbag system readiness light, the airbag
back up power, the airbag ignitors and safety belt pretensioners.
Front passenger sensing system
The front passenger sensing system is designed to meet the regulatory
requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) 208
and is designed to disable (will not inflate) the front passenger’s frontal
airbag under certain conditions.
The front passenger sensing system works with sensors that are part of
the front passenger’s seat and safety belt. The sensors are designed to
detect the presence of a properly seated occupant and determine if the
front passenger’s frontal airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or
disabled (will not inflate).
The front passenger sensing system will disable (will not inflate) the
front passenger’s frontal airbag if:
• the front passenger seat is unoccupied, or has small/medium objects in
the front seat,
• the system determines that an infant is present in a rear-facing infant
seat that is installed according to the manufacturer’s instructions,
• the system determines that a small child is present in a forward-facing
child restraint that is installed according to the manufacturer’s
instructions,
• the system determines that a small child is present in a booster seat,
• a front passenger takes his/her weight off of the seat for a period of
time.
128
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
The front passenger sensing system will turn off the passenger seat side
airbag if:
• the seat is empty and safety belt is unbuckled.
• a child or a small person occupies the front passenger seat and the
child or small person is unbuckled.
The front passenger sensing system
uses a ⬙passenger airbag off⬙ or
⬙pass airbag off⬙ indicator which will
light and stay lit to remind you that
the front passenger frontal airbag is
off. The indicator lamp is located in
the center stack of the instrument panel above the climate controls.
Note: The indicator lamp will illuminate for a short period of time when
the ignition is turned to the ON position to confirm it is functional.
When the front passenger seat is not occupied (empty seat) or in the
event that the front passenger frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate), the
indicator lamp will be unlit.
The front passenger sensing system is designed to disable (will not
inflate) the front passenger’s frontal airbag when a rear facing infant
seat, a forward-facing child restraint, or a booster seat is detected.
• When the front passenger sensing system disables (will not inflate)
the front passenger frontal airbag, the indicator lamp will illuminate
and stay lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal airbag is
disabled.
• If the child restraint has been installed and the indicator lamp is not
lit, then turn the vehicle off, remove the child restraint from the
vehicle and reinstall the restraint following the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions.
The front passenger sensing system is designed to enable (may inflate)
the front passenger’s frontal airbag anytime the system senses that a
person of adult size is sitting properly in the front passenger seat.
• When the front passenger sensing system enables the front passenger
frontal airbag (may inflate), the indicator lamp will be unlit and stay
unlit.
If a person of adult size is sitting in the front passenger’s seat, but the
⬙passenger airbag off⬙ or ⬙pass airbag off⬙ indicator lamp is lit, it is
possible that the person isn’t sitting properly in the seat. If this happens:
• Turn the vehicle off and ask the person to place the seatback in the
full upright position.
129
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
• Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion,
with the person’s legs comfortably extended.
• Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this position for
about two minutes. This will allow the system to detect that person
and enable the passenger’s frontal airbag.
• If the indicator lamp remains lit even after this, the person should be
advised to ride in the rear seat.
Pass Airbag Off
Occupant Passenger Airbag
Indicator Lamp
Empty seat Unlit Disabled
Small child in child Lit Disabled
safety seat or booster
Small child with safety Lit Disabled
belt buckled or
unbuckled
Adult Unlit Enabled
Even with Advanced Restraints Systems, children 12 and under
should be properly restrained in the back seat.
After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on safety belts, it’s
very important that they continue to sit properly. A properly seated
occupant sits upright, leaning against the seat back, and centered on the
seat cushion, with their feet comfortably extended on the floor. Sitting
improperly can increase the chance of injury in a crash event. For
example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward,
leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of
injury during a crash is greatly increased.
Sitting improperly out of position or with the seat back reclined
too far can take off weight from the seat cushion and affect the
decision of the front passenger sensing system, resulting in serious
injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright against your seatback, with your feet on the floor.
The front passenger sensing system may detect small or medium objects
placed on the seat cushion. For most objects that are in the front
passenger seat, the passenger airbag will be disabled. Even though the
passenger airbag is disabled, the ⬙pass airbag off⬙ lamp may or may not
be illuminated according to the table below.
130
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Pass Airbag Off

Objects Passenger Airbag
Indicator Lamp
Small (i.e. 3 ring Unlit Disabled
binder, small purse,
bottled water)
Medium (i.e. heavy Lit Disabled
briefcase, fully packed
luggage)
Empty seat, or small Lit Disabled
to medium object with
safety belt buckled
If you think that the status of the passenger airbag off indicator lamp is
incorrect, check for the following:
• Objects lodged underneath the seat
• Objects between the seat cushion and the center console (if
equipped)
• Objects hanging off the seat back
• Objects stowed in the seatback map pocket (if equipped)
• Objects placed on the occupant’s lap
• Cargo interference with the seat
• Other passengers pushing or pulling on the seat
• Rear passenger feet and knees resting or pushing on the seat
The conditions listed above may cause the weight of a properly seated
occupant to be incorrectly interpreted by the front passenger sensing
system. The person in the front passenger seat may appear heavier or
lighter due to the conditions described in the list above.
To reduce the risk of possible serious injury:
Do not stow objects in seat back map pocket (if equipped) or
hang objects off seat back if a child is in the front passenger seat.
Do not place objects underneath the front passenger seat or between
the seat and the center console (if equipped).
Check the “passenger airbag off” or “pass airbag off” indicator lamp for
proper airbag Status.
Failure to follow these instructions may interfere with the front
passenger seat sensing system.
131
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
In case there is a problem with the
front passenger sensing system, the
airbag readiness light in the
instrument cluster will stay lit.
If the airbag readiness light is lit, do the following:
The driver and/or adult passengers should check for any objects that
may be lodged underneath the front passenger seat or cargo interfering
with the seat.
If objects are lodged and/or cargo is interfering with the seat; please take
the following steps to remove the obstruction:
• Pull the vehicle over.
• Turn the vehicle off.
• Driver and/or adult passengers should check for any objects lodged
underneath the front passenger seat or cargo interfering with the seat.
• Remove the obstruction(s) (if found).
• Restart the vehicle.
• Wait at least 2 minutes and verify that the airbag readiness light is no
longer illuminated
• If the airbag readiness light remains illuminated, this may or may/not
be a problem due to the front passenger sensing system.
DO NOT attempt to repair or service the system; take your vehicle
immediately to an authorized dealer.
If it is necessary to modify an advanced front airbag system to
accommodate a person with disabilities, contact the Ford Customer
Relationship Center at the phone number shown in the Customer
Assistance section of this Owner’s Guide.
Any alteration/modification to the front passenger seat may
affect the performance of the front passenger sensing system.
Determining if the system is operational

The supplemental restraint system uses a warning indicator light in the
instrument cluster or a back-up tone to indicate the condition of the
system. Refer to the Warning lights and chimes section in the
Instrument Cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the airbag is not
required.
132
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following:
• The readiness light (same light
for front and side airbag system)
will either flash or stay lit.
• The readiness light will not
illuminate immediately after ignition is turned on.
periodically until the problem and/or light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the supplemental
restraint system serviced at an authorized dealer immediately. Unless
serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a
collision.
Seat-mounted side airbag system

Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near the airbag
cover on the side of the seatbacks of the front seats or in front
seat areas that may come into contact with a deploying airbag. Failure
to follow these instructions may increase the risk of personal injury in
the event of a collision.
Do not use accessory seat covers. The use of accessory seat

covers may prevent the deployment of the side airbags and
increase the risk of injury in an accident.
Do not lean your head on the door. The side airbag could injure
you as it deploys from the side of the seatback.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the airbag SRS, its

fuses or the seat cover on a seat containing an airbag. See your
authorized dealer.
All occupants of the vehicle should always wear their safety belts
even when an airbag SRS is provided.
133
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
How does the side airbag system work?
The design and development of the side airbag system included
recommended testing procedures that were developed by a group of
automotive safety experts known as the Side Airbag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of side airbags (including side air
curtain systems).
The side airbag system consists of
the following:
• An inflatable nylon bag (airbag)
with a gas generator concealed
behind the outboard bolster of
the driver and front passenger
seatbacks.
• The same warning light,
electronic control and diagnostic
unit as used for the front airbags.
• Two crash sensors located under the outboard side of the front seats,
attached near the floor.
Side airbags, in combination with safety belts, can help reduce the risk of
severe injuries in the event of a significant side impact collision.
The side airbags are fitted on the outboard side of the seatbacks of the
front seats. In certain lateral collisions, the airbag on the side affected by
the collision will be inflated. If the front passenger sensing system
detects an empty seat or an unbuckled child or small person, the front
passenger seat-mounted side airbag will be deactivated. The airbag was
designed to inflate between the door panel and occupant to further
enhance the protection provided occupants in side impact collisions.
The airbag SRS is designed to activate when the vehicle sustains lateral
deceleration sufficient to cause the sensors to close an electrical circuit
that initiates airbag inflation.
The fact that the airbags did not inflate in a collision does not mean that
something is wrong with the system. Rather, it means the forces were
not of the type sufficient to cause activation. Side airbags are designed
to inflate in side-impact collisions, not roll-over, rear-impact, frontal or
near-frontal collisions, unless the collision causes sufficient lateral
deceleration.
134
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
If the side airbag has

deployed, the airbag will
not function again. The side
airbag system (including the
seat) must be inspected and
serviced by an authorized
dealer. If the airbag is not
replaced, the unrepaired area will
increase the risk of injury in a
collision.

The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to
indicate the condition of the system. Refer to the Airbag readiness
section in the Instrument Cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the
airbag is not required.
Any difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the
following:
• The readiness light (same light as used for front airbag system) will
either flash or stay lit.
• The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is
turned to the RUN position.
periodically until the problem and light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced
at an authorized dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the system may not
function properly in the event of a collision.
135
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Side curtain airbag system
Do not place objects or

mount equipment on or
near the headliner at the siderail
that may come into contact with a
deploying side air curtain. Failure
to follow these instructions may
increase the risk of personal injury
in the event of a collision.
Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near the side air

curtain cover.
Do not lean your head on the door. The side airbag could injure
you as it deploys from the seat.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the side air curtain

system, its fuses, the A, B, or C pillar trim, or the headliner on a
vehicle containing a side air curtain. See your authorized dealer.

wear their safety belts even when an inflatable curtain is
provided.
To reduce the risk of injury, do not obstruct or place objects in

the deployment zone of the inflatable curtain.
136
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
How does the side air curtain system work?
The design and development of the
side air curtain system included
recommended testing procedures
that were developed by a group of
automotive safety experts known as
the Side Airbag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing
procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of
side airbags (including side air
curtain systems).
The side air curtain system consists
of the following:
• An inflatable nylon curtain with a
gas generator concealed behind
the headliner and above the
doors.
• The headliner will flex to open
above the side doors to allow air curtain deployment.
• The same warning light, electronic control and diagnostic unit as used
for the front airbags.
• Two crash sensors located under the outboard side of the front seats,
attached near the floor.
• Two crash sensors located at the base of the “C” pillars above the
wheel house.
Side air curtains and side airbags, in combination with safety belts, can
help reduce the risk of severe injuries in the event of a significant side
impact collision.
Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in
the rear seats. The side air curtain will not interfere with children
restrained using a properly installed child or booster seat because it is
designed to inflate downward from the headliner above the doors along
the side window openings.
The side air curtains are mounted to the sheet metal above the first and
second row seats. In certain lateral collisions, the air curtain and
seat-mounted side airbag on the side affected by the collision will be
inflated, except that the passenger sensing system will deactivate the
passenger seat-mounted side airbag if it detects an empty unbuckled
137
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
passenger seat or an unbuckled child or small person in the passenger
seat. The air curtain was designed to inflate between the side window
area and occupant to further enhance the head protection provided to
occupants in side impact collisions. The seat-mounted side airbag was
designed to inflate between the door panel and occupant to further
enhance the protection provided occupants in side impact collisions.
The side air curtain system SRS is designed to activate when the vehicle
sustains lateral deceleration sufficient to cause the sensors to close an
electrical circuit that initiates air curtain and seat-mounted side airbag
inflation.
The fact that the side air curtain and seat-mounted side airbag did not
inflate in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with the
system. Rather, it means the forces were not of the type sufficient to
cause activation. The side air curtain system is designed to inflate in side
impact collisions, not roll-over, rear impact, frontal or near-frontal
collisions, unless the collision causes sufficient lateral deceleration.
If the side air curtain has

deployed, the air curtain
will not function again. The
side air curtain system
(including the A, B and C
pillar trim and headliner) must
be inspected and serviced by
an authorized dealer. If the air
curtain is not replaced, the
unrepaired area will increase the
risk of injury in a collision.

The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to
indicate the condition of the system. Refer to the Airbag readiness
section in the Instrument Cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the
airbag is not required.
138
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Any difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the
following:
• The readiness light (same light as used for front airbag system) will
either flash or stay lit.
• The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is
turned to the RUN position.
periodically until the problem and light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced
at an authorized dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the system may not
function properly in the event of a collision.
Disposal of airbags and airbag equipped vehicles (including
pretensioners)
See your authorized dealer. Airbags MUST BE disposed of by qualified
personnel.
SAFETY RESTRAINTS FOR CHILDREN
See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety
restraints for children. Also see Airbag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) in this chapter for special instructions about using airbags.
Important child restraint precautions
You are required by law to use safety restraints for children in the U.S.
and Canada. If small children (generally children who are four years old
or younger and who weigh 40 lb [18 kg] or less) ride in your vehicle, you
must put them in safety seats made especially for children. Many states
require that children use approved booster seats until they are eight
years old. Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific
requirements regarding the safety of children in your vehicle. When
possible, always place children under age 12 in the rear seat of your
vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating position.
Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the
vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from
Always follow the instructions and warnings that come with any infant or
child restraint you might use.
139
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Children and safety belts
If the child is the proper size, restrain the child in a safety seat. Children
who are too large for child safety seats (as specified by your child safety
seat manufacturer) should always wear safety belts.
Follow all the important safety restraint and airbag precautions that
apply to adult passengers in your vehicle.
If the shoulder belt portion of a combination lap and shoulder belt can
be positioned so it does not cross or rest in front of the child’s face or
neck, the child should wear the lap and shoulder belt. Moving the child
closer to the center of the vehicle may help provide a good shoulder belt
fit.
Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets unattended in
your vehicle.
Child booster seats

Children outgrow a typical convertible or toddler seat when they weigh
40 lb (18 kg) and are around 4 years of age. Although the lap/shoulder
belt will provide some protection, these children are still too small for
lap/shoulder belts to fit properly, which could increase the risk of serious
injury in a crash.
To improve the fit of both the lap and shoulder belt on children who
have outgrown child safety seats, Ford Motor Company recommends use
of a belt-positioning booster.
Booster seats position a child so that safety belts fit better. They lift the
child up so that the lap belt rests low across the hips and the knees
bend comfortably. Booster seats may also make the shoulder belt fit
better and more comfortably. Try to keep the belt near the middle of the
shoulder.
When children should use booster seats
Children need to use booster seats from the time they outgrow the
toddler seat until they are big enough for the vehicle seat and
lap/shoulder belt to fit properly. Generally this is when they weigh about
80 lb (36 kg) (about 8 to 12 years old).
140
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these
questions:
• Can the child sit all the way back
against the vehicle seat back with
knees bent comfortably at the
edge of the seat without
slouching?
• Does the lap belt rest low across the hips?

• Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest?
• Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
Types of booster seats
There are two types of belt-positioning booster seats:
• Those that are backless.
If your backless booster seat has a
removable shield, remove the
shield and use the lap/shoulder
belt. If a seating position has a
low seat back and no head
restraint, a backless booster seat
may place your child’s head (top
of ear level) above the top of the
seat. In this case, move the
backless booster to another
seating position with a higher seat back and lap/shoulder belts.
• Those with a high back.
If, with a backless booster seat,
you cannot find a seating position
that adequately supports your
child’s head, a high back booster
seat would be a better choice.
Either type can be used at any seating position equipped with

lap/shoulder belts if your child is over 40 lb (18 kg).
141
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Children and booster seats vary widely in size and shape. Choose a
booster that keeps the lap belt low and snug across the hips, never up
across the stomach, and lets you adjust the shoulder belt to cross the
chest and rest snugly near the center of the shoulder. The drawings
below compare the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt uncomfortably
close to the neck and a shoulder belt that could slip off the shoulder.
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat, placing a rubberized mesh sold
as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this condition.
The importance of shoulder belts
Using a booster without a shoulder belt increases the risk of a child’s head
hitting a hard surface in a collision. For this reason, you should never use a
booster seat with a lap belt only. It is best to use a booster seat with
lap/shoulder belts in the back seat- the safest place for children to ride.
Move a child to a different seating location if the shoulder belt
does not stay positioned on the shoulder during use.
Follow all instructions provided by the manufacturer of the

booster seat.
Never put the shoulder belt under a child’s arm or behind the
back because it eliminates the protection for the upper part of
the body and may increase the risk of injury or death in a collision.
Never use pillows, books, or towels to boost a child. They can

slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or death in a
collision.
142
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
SAFETY SEATS FOR CHILDREN
Child and infant or child safety seats

Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight of the
child. Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions with the
safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install and use the
safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden stop or
collision.
When installing a child safety seat:
• Review and follow the information
presented in the Airbag
supplemental restraint system
(SRS) section in this chapter.
• Use the correct safety belt buckle
for that seating position.
• Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle until you hear a
snap and feel it latch. Make sure
the tongue is securely fastened in
the buckle.
• Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety
seat, with the tongue between the child seat and the release button,
to prevent accidental unbuckling.
• Place seat back in upright position.
• Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode. Refer to Automatic
locking mode.
• LATCH lower anchors are recommended for use by children up to 48
lb (22 kg) in a child restraint. Top tether anchors can be used for
children up to 60 lb (27 kg) in a child restraint, and to provide upper
torso restraint for children up to 80 lb (36 kg) using an upper torso
harness and a belt-positioning booster.
Ford Motor Company recommends the use of a child safety seat having a
top tether strap. Install the child safety seat in a seating position with
LATCH and tether anchors. For more information on top tether straps
and anchors, refer to Attaching child safety seats with tether straps in
this chapter. For more information of LATCH anchors refer to Attaching
child safety seats with LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children) attachments for child seat anchors in this chapter.
143
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions included

with the safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install
and use the safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden
stop or collision.
Rear-facing child seats or infant carriers should never be placed

in front of an active passenger airbag.
Installing child safety seats with combination lap and shoulder

belts
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. NEVER place a
rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag. If you must use
a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the seat all the way
back.
Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in the rear

seat whenever possible.
1. Position the child safety seat in a

seat with a combination lap and
shoulder belt.
144
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
2. Pull down on the shoulder belt
and then grasp the shoulder belt
and lap belt together.
3. While holding the shoulder and

lap belt portions together, route the
tongue through the child seat
according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure
the belt webbing is not twisted.
4. Insert the belt tongue into the

proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) for that seating position until
you hear a snap and feel the latch
engage. Make sure the tongue is
latched securely by pulling on it.
145
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
5. To put the retractor in the
automatic locking mode, grasp the
shoulder portion of the belt and pull
downward until all of the belt is
pulled out and a click is heard.
6. Allow the belt to retract. The belt will click as it retracts to indicate it
is in the automatic locking mode.
7. Pull the lap belt portion across
the child seat toward the buckle and
pull up on the shoulder belt while
pushing down with your knee on the
child seat.
8. Allow the safety belt to retract to

remove any slack in the belt.
9. Before placing the child in the
seat, forcibly move the seat forward
and back to make sure the seat is
securely held in place. To check
this, grab the seat at the belt path
and attempt to move it side to side
and forward. There should be no
more than one inch (2.5 cm) of
movement for proper installation.
10. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is
in the automatic locking mode (you should not be able to pull more belt
out). If the retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt and repeat Steps 2
through 9.
Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each use.
146
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Attaching child safety seats with tether straps
Most new forward-facing child safety seats include a tether strap which
goes over the back of the seat and hooks to an anchoring point. Tether
straps are available as an accessory for many older safety seats. Contact
the manufacturer of your child seat for information about ordering a
tether strap.
The rear seats of your vehicle are equipped with built-in tether strap
anchors located behind the seats as described below.
The tether anchors in your vehicle are located under a cover marked
with the tether anchor symbol (shown with title).
The tether strap anchors in your
vehicle are in the following positions
(shown from top view):
Attach the tether strap only to the appropriate tether anchor as

shown. The tether strap may not work properly if attached
somewhere other than the correct tether anchor.
1. Position the child safety seat on the seat cushion.

2. Route the child safety seat tether strap over the back of the seat.
For vehicles with adjustable head restraints, route the tether strap under
the head restraint and between the head restraint posts, otherwise route
the tether strap over the top of the seatback.
3. Locate the correct anchor for the
selected seating position.
147
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
4. Open the tether anchor cover.
5. Clip the tether strap to the

anchor as shown.
If the tether strap is clipped
incorrectly, the child safety
seat may not be retained properly
in the event of a collision.
6. Install the child safety seat tightly using the LATCH anchors or safety
belts. Follow the instructions in this chapter.
7. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child
being injured in a collision greatly increases.
Attaching child safety seats with LATCH (Lower Anchors and

Tethers for Children) attachments for child seat anchors
Some child safety seats have two rigid or webbing mounted attachments
that connect to two anchors at certain seating positions in your vehicle.
This type of child seat eliminates the need to use safety belts to attach
the child seat. For forward-facing child seats, the tether strap must also
be attached to the proper tether anchor. See Attaching child safety
seats with tether straps in this chapter.
148
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Your vehicle has LATCH anchors for child seat installation at the seating
positions marked with the child seat symbol.
The anchors at the center of the
rear seat are further apart than the
sets of lower anchors for child seat
installation at other seating
positions. A child seat with rigid
LATCH attachments cannot be
installed at this seating position.
LATCH compatible child seats (with
attachments on belt webbing) can
be used at this seating position only if the child seat instructions state
that the child seat can be installed to anchors that are spaced up to 20
inches (500 mm) apart. Do not attach a child seat to any lower anchor if
an adjacent child seat is attached to that anchor.
Never attach two LATCH child safety seats to the same anchor.
In a crash, one anchor may not be strong enough to hold two
child safety seat attachments and may break, causing serious injury or
death.
The lower anchors for child seat

installation are located at the rear
section of the rear seat between the
cushion and seat back. The LATCH
anchors are below the locator
symbols on the seat back.
Follow the child seat manufacturer’s instructions to properly install a

child seat with LATCH attachments.
Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child seat only to the
anchors shown.
149
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
If you install a child seat with rigid LATCH attachments, do not tighten
the tether strap enough to lift the child seat off the vehicle seat cushion
when the child is seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug without
lifting the front of the child seat. Keeping the child seat just touching the
vehicle seat gives the best protection in a severe crash.
Each time you use the safety seat, check that the seat is properly
attached to the lower anchors and tether anchor. Try to tilt the child
seat from side to side. Also try to tug the seat forward. Check to see if
the anchors hold the seat in place.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child
being injured in a crash greatly increases.
150
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
INFORMATION ABOUT UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires. The
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For
example:
• Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United
States Department of Transportation has set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires. They do
not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver or
temporary use spare tires, light truck or “LT” type tires, tires with
nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as
defined in Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2).
U.S. Department of Transportation-Tire quality grades: The U.S.
Department of Transportation requires Ford Motor Company to give you
the following information about tire grades exactly as the government
has written it.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual
conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA A B C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The
grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
151
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on

straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature A B C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 139. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by
law.
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
TIRES
Tires are designed to give many thousands of miles of service, but they
must be maintained in order to get the maximum benefit from them.
Glossary of tire terminology
• Tire label: A label showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire sizes,
recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle
can carry.
• Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number on the sidewall of
each tire providing information about the tire brand and
manufacturing plant, tire size and date of manufacture. Also referred
to as DOT code.
• Inflation pressure: A measure of the amount of air in a tire.
• Standard load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
maximum load at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires]. Increasing
the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire’s
load carrying capability.
• Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
heavier maximum load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric tires].
152
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase
the tire’s load carrying capability.
• kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pressure.
• PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard unit of air pressure.
• Cold inflation pressure: The tire pressure when the vehicle has
been stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and
prior to the vehicle being driven for 1 mile (1.6 km).
• Recommended inflation pressure: The cold inflation pressure found
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label located on
the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.
• B-pillar: The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the
front door.
• Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next to the rim.
• Sidewall of the tire: Area between the bead area and the tread.
• Tread area of the tire: Area of the perimeter of the tire that
contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle.
• Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube assembly
upon which the tire beads are seated.
INFLATING YOUR TIRES
Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properly
inflated. Remember that a tire can lose up to half of its air pressure
without appearing flat.
Every day before you drive, check your tires. If one looks lower than the
others, use a tire gauge to check pressure of all tires and adjust if
required.
At least once a month and before long trips, inspect each tire and check
the tire pressure with a tire gauge (including spare, if equipped). Inflate
all tires to the inflation pressure recommended by Ford Motor Company.
Use a tire gauge to check the tire inflation pressure, including the spare
(if equipped), at least monthly and before long trips. You are strongly
urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge, as automatic service station
gauges may be inaccurate. Ford recommends the use of a digital or
dial-type tire pressure gauge rather than a stick-type tire pressure gauge.
Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire
performance and wear. Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause
uneven treadwear patterns.
153
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Under-inflation is the most common cause of tire failures and

may result in severe tire cracking, tread separation or ⬙blowout⬙,
with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk of injury.
Under-inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling resistance,
resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire. It also may
result in unnecessary tire stress, irregular wear, loss of vehicle control
and accidents. A tire can lose up to half of its air pressure and not
appear to be flat!
Always inflate your tires to the Ford recommended inflation pressure

even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found
on the tire. The Ford recommended tire inflation pressure is found on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label which is located
on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. Failure to follow the tire
pressure recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and
adversely affect the way your vehicle handles.
Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure is the tire manufacturer’s
maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at which the
maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is normally
higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation pressure
which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire
Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.
The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the
recommended pressure on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or
Tire Label.
When weather temperature changes occur, tire inflation pressures also
change. A 10°F (6°C) temperature drop can cause a corresponding drop
of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check your tire pressures
frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label.
To check the pressure in your tire(s):
1. Make sure the tires are cool, meaning they are not hot from driving
even a mile.
If you are checking tire pressure when the tire is hot, (i.e. driven more
than 1 mile [1.6 km]), never “bleed” or reduce air pressure. The tires are
hot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above
recommended cold pressures. A hot tire at or below recommended cold
inflation pressure could be significantly under-inflated.
154
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Note: If you have to drive a distance to get air for your tire(s), check
and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure
when you get to the pump. It is normal for tires to heat up and the air
pressure inside to go up as you drive.
2. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire, then firmly press the tire
gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure.
3. Add enough air to reach the recommended air pressure.
Note: If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the metal stem in
the center of the valve. Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge.
4. Replace the valve cap.
5. Repeat this procedure for each tire, including the spare.
Note: Some spare tires operate at a higher inflation pressure than the
other tires. For T-type/mini-spare tires (see Dissimilar Spare
Tire/Wheel Information section for description): Store and maintain at
60 psi (4.15 bar). For Full Size and Dissimilar spare tires (see
Dissimilar Spare Tire/Wheel Information section for description):
Store and maintain at the higher of the front and rear inflation pressure
as shown on the Tire Label.
6. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other
objects embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air
leak.
7. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts or bulges.
TIRE CARE
Inspecting your tires
Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and
remove objects such as stones, nails or glass that may be wedged in the
tread grooves. Check for holes or cuts that may permit air leakage from
the tire and make necessary repairs. Also inspect the tire sidewalls for
cracking, cuts, bruises and other signs of damage or excessive wear. If
internal damage to the tire is suspected, have the tire demounted and
inspected in case it needs to be repaired or replaced. For your safety,
tires that are damaged or show signs of excessive wear should not be
used because they are more likely to blow out or fail.
155
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear
abnormally. Inspect all your tires, including the spare, frequently, and
replace them if one or more of the following conditions exist:
Tire wear
When the tread is worn down to
1/16th of an inch (2 mm), tires must
be replaced to help prevent your
vehicle from skidding and
hydroplaning. Built-in treadwear
indicators, or “wear bars”, which
look like narrow strips of smooth
rubber across the tread will appear
on the tire when the tread is worn
down to 1/16th of an inch (2 mm).
When the tire tread wears down to
the same height as these “wear bars”, the tire is worn out and must be
replaced.
Damage
Periodically inspect the tire treads and sidewalls for damage (such as
bulges in the tread or sidewalls, cracks in the tread groove and
separation in the tread or sidewall). If damage is observed or suspected
have the tire inspected by a tire professional. Tires can be damaged
during off-road use, so inspection after off-road use is also
recommended.
Age
Tires degrade over time depending on many factors such as
weather, storage conditions, and conditions of use (load, speed,
inflation pressure, etc.) the tires experience throughout their lives.
In general, tires should be replaced after six years regardless of tread
wear. However, heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading
conditions can accelerate the aging process and may require tires to be
replaced more frequently.
You should replace your spare tire when you replace the road tires or
after six years due to aging even if it has not been used.
156
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of
the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for
safety standard certification and in case of a recall.
This begins with the letters “DOT” and indicates that the tire meets all
federal standards. The next two numbers or letters are the plant code
designating where it was manufactured, the next two are the tire size
code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was
built. For example, the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After
2000 the numbers go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th
week of 2001. The numbers in between are identification codes used for
traceability. This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect
requires a recall.
Tire replacement requirements
Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and
handling capability.
Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the same size,
load index, speed rating and type (such as P-metric versus
LT-metric or all-season versus all-terrain) as those originally provided
by Ford. The recommended tire and wheel size may be found on either
the Safety Compliance Certification Label or the Tire Label which is
located on the B-Pillar or edge of the driver’s door. If this information
is not found on these labels then you should consult your Ford dealer.
Use of any tire or wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the
safety and performance of your vehicle, which could result in an
increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury
and death. Additionally the use of non-recommended tires and wheels
could cause steering, suspension, axle or transfer case/power transfer
unit failure. If you have questions regarding tire replacement, see an
authorized dealer.
157
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
When mounting replacement tires and wheels, you should not

exceed the maximum pressure indicated on the sidewall of the
tire to set the beads without additional precautions listed below. If the
beads do not seat at the maximum pressure indicated, re-lubricate and
try again.
When inflating the tire for mounting pressures up to 20 psi (1.38 bar)
greater than the maximum pressure on the tire sidewall, the following
precautions must be taken to protect the person mounting the tire:
1. Make sure that you have the correct tire and wheel size.
2. Lubricate the tire bead and wheel bead seat area again.
3. Stand at a minimum of 12 ft. (3.66 m) away from the tire wheel
assembly.
4. Use both eye and ear protection.
For a mounting pressure more than 20 psi (1.38 bar) greater than the
maximum pressure, a Ford Dealer or other tire service professional
should do the mounting.
Always inflate steel carcass tires with a remote air fill with the person
inflating standing at a minimum of 12 ft. (3.66 m) away from the tire
wheel assembly.
Important: Remember to replace the wheel valve stems when the road
tires are replaced on your vehicle.
It is recommended that the two front tires or two rear tires generally be
replaced as a pair.
The tire pressure sensors mounted in the wheels (originally installed on
your vehicle) are not designed to be used in aftermarket wheels.
The use of wheels or tires not recommended by Ford Motor Company
may affect the operation of your Tire Pressure Monitoring System.
If the TPMS indicator is flashing, your TPMS is malfunctioning. Your
replacement tire might be incompatible with your TPMS, or some
component of the TPMS may be damaged.
Safety practices
Driving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety.
• Observe posted speed limits
• Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
• Avoid potholes and objects on the road
158
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
• Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking
If your vehicle is stuck in snow, mud, sand, etc., do not rapidly
spin the tires; spinning the tires can tear the tire and cause an
explosion. A tire can explode in as little as three to five seconds.
Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h). The tires may
fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
Highway hazards
No matter how carefully you drive there’s always the possibility that you
may eventually have a flat tire on the highway. Drive slowly to the
closest safe area out of traffic. This may further damage the flat tire, but
your safety is more important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving, or you
suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged, immediately reduce your
speed. Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road. Stop and
inspect the tires for damage. If a tire is under-inflated or damaged,
deflate it, remove wheel and replace it with your spare tire and wheel. If
you cannot detect a cause, have the vehicle towed to the nearest repair
facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected.
Tire and wheel alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your
vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires. If your
vehicle seems to pull to one side when you’re driving, the wheels may be
out of alignment. Have an authorized dealer check the wheel alignment
periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid
treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by an authorized dealer.
Front wheel drive (FWD) vehicles and those with an independent rear
suspension (if equipped) may require alignment of all four wheels.
The tires should also be balanced periodically. An unbalanced tire and
wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear.
Tire rotation
Rotating your tires at the recommended interval (as indicated in the
scheduled maintenance information that comes with your vehicle) will
help your tires wear more evenly, providing better tire performance and
longer tire life.
159
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
• Front Wheel Drive (FWD)/All
Wheel Drive vehicles (front tires
at top of diagram)
Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires.

Note: If your tires show uneven wear ask an authorized dealer to check
for and correct any wheel misalignment, tire imbalance or mechanical
problem involved before tire rotation.
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire/wheel. A
dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that is
different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels. If
you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel it is intended for temporary use
only and should not be used in a tire rotation.
Note: After having your tires rotated, inflation pressure must be checked
and adjusted to the vehicle requirements.
INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THE TIRE SIDEWALL

Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of
the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for
safety standard certification and in case of a recall.
160
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Information on “P” type tires
P215/65R15 95H is an example of a
tire size, load index and speed
rating. The definitions of these
items are listed below. (Note that
the tire size, load index and speed
rating for your vehicle may be
different from this example.)
1. P: Indicates a tire, designated by
the Tire and Rim Association
(T&RA), that may be used for
service on cars, SUVs, minivans and
light trucks.
Note: If your tire size does not
begin with a letter this may mean it
is designated by either ETRTO
(European Tire and Rim Technical Organization) or JATMA (Japan Tire
Manufacturing Association).
2. 215: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from
sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the
wider the tire.
3. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width.
4. R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.
5. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
6. 95: Indicates the tire’s load index. It is an index that relates to how
much weight a tire can carry. You may find this information in your
Owner’s Guide. If not, contact a local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
7. H: Indicates the tire’s speed rating. The speed rating denotes the
speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of
time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure. The tires
on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load and inflation
pressure. These speed ratings may need to be adjusted for the difference
in conditions. The ratings range from 81 mph (130 km/h) to 186 mph
(299 km/h). These ratings are listed in the following chart.
161
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
Letter rating Speed rating - mph (km/h)
M 81 mph (130 km/h)
N 87 mph (140 km/h)
Q 99 mph (159 km/h)
R 106 mph (171 km/h)
S 112 mph (180 km/h)
T 118 mph (190 km/h)
U 124 mph (200 km/h)
H 130 mph (210 km/h)
V 149 mph (240 km/h)
W 168 mph (270 km/h)
Y 186 mph (299 km/h)
Note: For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph
(240 km/h), tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR. For
those with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph (299 km/h), tire
manufacturers always use the letters ZR.
8. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN): This begins with the
letters “DOT” and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards. The
next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was
manufactured, the next two are the tire size code and the last four
numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example,
the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After 2000 the numbers
go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th week of 2001. The
numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability. This
information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall.
9. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
10. Tire Ply Composition and Material Used: Indicates the number of
plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and
sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the
tire and the sidewall, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
11. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the tire. Refer to the Safety Compliance
Certification Label, which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver’s door, for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle.
162
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
12. Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades
• Treadwear: The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (11⁄2) times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
• Traction: The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B,
and C. The grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement
as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
• Temperature: The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
13. Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure: Indicates the tire
manufacturers’ maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at
which the maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is
normally higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation
pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label or Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver’s door. The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than
the recommended pressure on the vehicle label.
The tire suppliers may have additional markings, notes or warnings such
as standard load, radial tubeless, etc.
163
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Additional information contained on the tire sidewall for “LT” type
tires
“LT” type tires have some additional
information beyond those of “P”
type tires; these differences are
described below.
Note: Tire Quality Grades do not
apply to this type of tire.
1. LT: Indicates a tire, designated by
the Tire and Rim Association
(T&RA), that is intended for service
on light trucks.
2. Load Range/Load Inflation
Limits: Indicates the tire’s
load-carrying capabilities and its
inflation limits.
3. Maximum Load Dual lb. (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a dual; defined
as four tires on the rear axle (a total of six or more tires on the vehicle).
4. Maximum Load Single lb. (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single;
defined as two tires (total) on the rear axle.
164
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Information on “T” type tires
“T” type tires have some additional
information beyond those of “P”
type tires; these differences are
described below:
T145/80D16 is an example of a tire
size.
Note: The temporary tire size for
your vehicle may be different from
this example. Tire Quality Grades do
not apply to this type of tire.
1. T: Indicates a type of tire,
designated by the Tire and Rim
Association (T&RA), that is
intended for temporary service on
cars, SUVs, minivans and light
trucks.
2. 145: Indicates the nominal width
of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general,
the larger the number, the wider the tire.
3. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width. Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall.
4. D: Indicates a “diagonal” type tire.
R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.
5. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
Location of the tire label

You will find a Tire Label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size
and other important information located on the B-Pillar or the edge of
the driver’s door. Refer to the payload description and graphic in the
Vehicle loading — with and without a trailer section.
165
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires
of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator
to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated.
This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as
the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions
may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function properly.
166
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System complies with part 15 of the FCC
rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System is NOT a substitute for
manually checking tire pressure. The tire pressure should be
checked periodically (at least monthly) using a tire gauge, see
Inflating your tires in this chapter. Failure to properly maintain your
tire pressure could increase the risk of tire failure, loss of control,
vehicle rollover and personal injury.
Changing tires with TPMS

Each road tire is equipped with
a tire pressure sensor fastened
to the inside rim of the wheel.
The pressure sensor is covered
by the tire and is not visible
unless the tire is removed. The
pressure sensor is located
opposite (180 degrees) from the
valve stem. Care must be taken
when changing the tire to avoid
damaging the sensor. It is
recommended that you always have
your tires serviced by an authorized
dealer.
The tire pressure should be checked
periodically (at least monthly) using
an accurate tire gauge, refer to
Inflating your tires in this chapter.
167
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Understanding your Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System measures pressure in your four
road tires and sends the tire pressure readings to your vehicle. The Low
Tire Pressure Warning Lamp will turn ON if the tire pressure is
significantly low. Once the light is illuminated, your tires are under
inflated and need to be inflated to the manufacturer’s recommended tire
pressure. Even if the light turns ON and a short time later turns OFF,
your tire pressure still needs to be checked. Visit www.checkmytires.org
for additional information.
When your temporary spare tire is installed
When one of your road tires needs to be replaced with the temporary
spare, the TPMS system will continue to identify an issue to remind you
that the damaged road wheel/tire needs to be repaired and put back on
your vehicle.
To restore the full functionality of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System,
have the damaged road wheel/tire repaired and remounted on your
vehicle. For additional information, refer to Changing tires with TPMS
in this section.
168
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
When you believe your system is not operating properly
The main function of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System is to warn you
when your tires need air. It can also warn you in the event the system is
no longer capable of functioning as intended. Please refer to the
following chart for information concerning your Tire Pressure Monitoring
System:
Low Tire Possible Customer Action Required
Pressure cause
Warning Light
Solid Warning Tire(s) 1. Check your tire pressure to
Light under-inflated ensure tires are properly inflated;
refer to Inflating your tires in
this chapter.
2. After inflating your tires to the
manufacturer’s recommended
inflation pressure as shown on the
Tire Label (located on the edge of
driver’s door or the B-Pillar), the
vehicle must be driven for at least
two minutes over 20 mph (32
km/h) before the light will turn
OFF.
Spare tire in Your temporary spare tire is in
use use. Repair the damaged road
wheel/tire and reinstall it on the
vehicle to restore system
functionality. For a description on
how the system functions, refer to
When your temporary spare tire
is installed in this section.
TPMS If your tires are properly inflated
malfunction and your spare tire is not in use
and the light remains ON, have the
system inspected by your
authorized dealer.
169
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Low Tire Possible Customer Action Required

Pressure cause
Warning Light
Flashing Warning Spare tire in Your temporary spare tire is in
Light use use. Repair the damaged road
wheel and re-mount it on the
vehicle to restore system
functionality. For a description of
how the system functions under
these conditions, refer to When
your temporary spare tire is
installed in this section.
TPMS If your tires are properly inflated
malfunction and your spare tire is not in use
and the TPMS warning light still
flashes, have the system inspected
by your authorized dealer.
When inflating your tires
When putting air into your tires (such as at a gas station or in your
garage), the Tire Pressure Monitoring System may not respond
immediately to the air added to your tires.
It may take up to two minutes of driving over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the
light to turn OFF after you have filled your tires to the recommended
inflation pressure.
How temperature affects your tire pressure
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) monitors tire pressure in
each pneumatic tire. While driving in a normal manner, a typical
passenger tire inflation pressure may increase approximately 2 to 4 psi
(14 to 28 kPa) from a cold start situation. If the vehicle is stationary
over night with the outside temperature significantly lower than the
daytime temperature, the tire pressure may decrease approximately 3 psi
(20.7 kPa) for a drop of 30° F (16.6°C) in ambient temperature. This
lower pressure value may be detected by the TPMS as being significantly
lower than the recommended inflation pressure and activate the TPMS
warning for low tire pressure. If the low tire pressure warning light is
ON, visually check each tire to verify that no tire is flat. (If one or more
tires are flat, repair as necessary.) Check air pressure in the road tires. If
any tire is under-inflated, carefully drive the vehicle to the nearest
location where air can be added to the tires. Inflate all the tires to the
recommended inflation pressure.
170
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
SNOW TIRES AND CHAINS
The original equipment tires on your vehicle have an all-weather tread
design to provide traction, handling, and braking performance in
year-round driving. You may install ⬙snow⬙ tires for improved traction
when driving in areas with sustained periods of snow or icy driving
conditions.
If you choose to install snow tires on your vehicle, they must be
the same size, construction, and load range as the original tires
listed on the tire placard, and they must be installed on all four wheels.
Mixing tires of different size or construction on your vehicle can
adversely affect your vehicle’s handling and braking, and may lead to
loss of vehicle control.
Do not use snow chains or cables on this vehicle as they may

cause damage to your vehicle which may lead to loss of vehicle
control.
VEHICLE LOADING
This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle to keep
your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating capability. Properly
loading your vehicle will provide maximum return of vehicle design
performance. Before loading your vehicle, familiarize yourself with the
following terms for determining your vehicle’s weight ratings from the
vehicle’s Tire Label or Safety Compliance Certification Label:
Base Curb Weight – is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of
fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or
optional equipment.
Vehicle Curb Weight – is the weight of your new vehicle when you
picked it up from your authorized dealer plus any aftermarket
equipment.
171
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Payload – is the combined weight of cargo and passengers that the

vehicle is carrying. The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found
on the Tire Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door
(vehicles exported outside the US and Canada may not have a Tire
Label). Look for “THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND
CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR XXX lb.” for
maximum payload. The payload listed on the Tire Label is the maximum
payload for the vehicle as built by the assembly plant. If any aftermarket
or authorized-dealer installed equipment has been installed on the
vehicle, the weight of the equipment must be subtracted from the
payload listed on the Tire Label in order to determine the new payload.
The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle can be limited
either by volume capacity (how much space is available) or by
payload capacity (how much weight the vehicle should carry). Once
you have reached the maximum payload of your vehicle, do not add
more cargo, even if there is space available. Overloading or improperly
loading your vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle control and
vehicle rollover.
172
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Example only:
Cargo Weight – includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight,
including cargo and optional equipment.
GAW (Gross Axle Weight) – is the total weight placed on each axle
(front and rear) – including vehicle curb weight and all payload.
173
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These
numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label
located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. The total
load on each axle must never exceed its GAWR.
Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification Label axle weight
rating limits could result in substandard vehicle handling or
performance, engine, transmission and/or structural damage, serious
damage to the vehicle, loss of control and personal injury.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) – is the Vehicle Curb Weight + cargo +

passengers.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating) – is the maximum
allowable weight of the fully loaded
vehicle (including all options,
equipment, passengers and cargo).
The GVWR is shown on the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label located on the B-Pillar or
the edge of the driver’s door.
The GVW must never exceed the
GVWR.
Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification Label vehicle

weight rating limits could result in substandard vehicle handling
or performance, engine, transmission and/or structural damage, serious
damage to the vehicle, loss of control and personal injury.
174
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the Safety

Compliance Certification Label.
Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities

than the original tires because they may lower the vehicle’s
GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires with a higher limit
than the original tires do not increase the GVWR and GAWR
limitations.
Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could result in

serious damage to the vehicle and/or personal injury.
Steps for determining the correct load limit:

1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX
kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs. and
there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 x 150)
= 650 lb.). In metric units (635-340 (5 x 68) = 295 kg.)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
The following gives you a few examples on how to calculate the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity:
• Another example for your vehicle with 1400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and
luggage capacity. You decide to go golfing. Is there enough load
capacity to carry you, 4 of your friends and all the golf bags? You and
four friends average 220 lb. (99 kg) each and the golf bags weigh
approximately 30 lb. (13.5 kg) each. The calculation would be: 1400 –
(5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1400 - 1100 - 150 = 150 lb. Yes, you have
enough load capacity in your vehicle to transport four friends and
your golf bags. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg -
(5 x 99 kg) - (5 x 13.5 kg) = 635 - 495 - 67.5 = 72.5 kg.
175
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
• A final example for your vehicle with 1400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and
luggage capacity. You and one of your friends decide to pick up
cement from the local home improvement store to finish that patio
you have been planning for the past 2 years. Measuring the inside of
the vehicle with the rear seat folded down, you have room for
12-100 lb. (45 kg) bags of cement. Do you have enough load capacity
to transport the cement to your home? If you and your friend each
weigh 220 lb. (99 kg), the calculation would be: 1400 - (2 x 220) -
(12 x 100) = 1400 - 440 - 1200 = - 240 lb. No, you do not have
enough cargo capacity to carry that much weight. In metric units, the
calculation would be: 635 kg - (2 x 99 kg) - (12 x 45 kg) = 635 - 198 -
540 = -103 kg. You will need to reduce the load weight by at least
240 lb. (104 kg). If you remove 3-100 lb. (45 kg) cement bags, then
the load calculation would be:
1400 - (2 x 220) - (9 x 100) = 1400 - 440 - 900 = 60 lb. Now you have
the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home. In
metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg - (2 x 99 kg) - (9 x 45 kg)
= 635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kg.
The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your
vehicle in a manner that does not overload the Front or the Rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating specified for your vehicle on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label found on the edge of the driver’s door.
TRAILER TOWING
Never tow a trailer with this vehicle. Your vehicle is not
equipped to tow. No towing packages are available through an
authorized dealer.
RECREATIONAL TOWING
Follow these guidelines if you have a need for recreational (RV) towing.
An example of recreational towing would be towing your vehicle behind
a motorhome. These guidelines are designed to ensure that your
transaxle is not damaged.
176
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Front Wheel Drive (FWD) vehicles:
Do not tow the vehicle with the front drive wheels on the ground or
transaxle damage may occur. It is recommended to tow your vehicle with
the front drive wheels on a dolly or with all four (4) wheels off the
ground on a car-hauling trailer.
In case of roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle, please refer to the
Wrecker towing section in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.
All Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicles:
Do not tow your vehicle with any wheels on the ground, as vehicle or
transaxle damage may occur. It is recommended to tow your vehicle with
all four (4) wheels off the ground such as when using a car-hauling
trailer. Otherwise, no recreational towing is permitted.
In case of roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle, please refer to the
Wrecker towing section in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.
177
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Driving
STARTING
Positions of the ignition
1. LOCK, locks the gearshift lever
and allows key removal. This
position also shuts the engine and
all electrical accessories off.
2. ACC, allows the electrical
accessories such as the radio to
operate while the engine is not
running.
3. RUN, all electrical circuits operational. Warning lights illuminated. Key
position when driving.
4. START, cranks the engine. Release the key as soon as the engine
starts.
Starting your vehicle
Engine starting is controlled by the powertrain control system.
This system meets all Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment
standard requirements regulating the impulse electrical field strength of
radio noise.
When starting a fuel-injected engine, don’t press the accelerator before
or during starting. Only use the accelerator when you have difficulty
starting the engine. For more information on starting the vehicle, refer to
Starting the engine in this chapter.
To avoid potential transmission damage at extremely cold temperatures
(below -20°F [-30°C]), it is recommended that the vehicle be warmed up
to normal operating temperature before driving at highway speeds above
50 mph (80 km/h). Normal operating temperature is normally reached
after 10 minutes of moderate driving or idling.
Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce very high
temperatures in the engine and exhaust system, creating the risk
of fire or other damage.
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry
ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine
compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
178
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Driving
Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in other enclosed

areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open the garage door
before you start the engine. See Guarding against exhaust fumes in
this chapter for more instructions.
If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealer
inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell
exhaust fumes.
Important safety precautions

When the engine starts, the idle RPM runs faster to warm the engine. If
the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically, have the vehicle
checked.
Before starting the vehicle:
1. Make sure all vehicle occupants buckle their safety belts. For more
information on safety belts and their proper usage, refer to the Seating
and Safety Restraints chapter.
2. Make sure the headlamps and electrical accessories are off.
• Make sure the parking brake is
set. 2 1
179
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Driving
• Make sure the gearshift is in P
(Park).
3. Turn the key to 3 (RUN) without

turning the key to 4 (START).
Some warning lights will briefly illuminate. See Warning lights and
chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter for more information
regarding the warning lights.
Starting the engine
1. Turn the key to 3 (RUN) without
turning the key to 4 (START).
2. Turn the key to 4 (START), then
release the key as soon as the
engine starts. Excessive cranking
could damage the starter.
180
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Driving
Note: If the engine does not start on the first try, turn the key to LOCK,
wait 10 seconds and try again. If the engine still fails to start, press the
accelerator to the floor and try again; this will allow the engine to crank
with the fuel shut off in case the engine is flooded with fuel.
This vehicle has a computer assisted cranking system which assists in
starting the engine. If the ignition key is turned to 4 (START) and then
released when the engine begins cranking, the engine may continue
cranking for up to 10 seconds or until the vehicle starts.
Guarding against exhaust fumes
Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes. Take precautions to avoid
its dangerous effects.
If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealer
inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell
exhaust fumes.
Important ventilating information

If the engine is idling while the vehicle is stopped for a long period of
time, open the windows at least one inch (2.5 cm) or adjust the heating
or air conditioning to bring in fresh air.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (IF EQUIPPED)
An engine block heater warms the engine coolant which aids in starting
and allows the heater/defroster system to respond quickly. If your vehicle
is equipped with this system, your equipment includes a heater element
which is installed in your engine block and a wire harness which allows
the user to connect the system to a grounded 120 volt a/c electrical
source. The block heater system is most effective when outdoor
temperatures reach below 0°F (-18°C).
Failure to follow engine block heater instructions could result in
property damage or physical injury.
To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not use your heater

with ungrounded electrical systems or two-pronged (cheater)
adapters.
181
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Driving
Prior to using the engine block heater, follow these recommendations for
proper and safe operation:
• For your safety, use an outdoor extension cord that is product
certified by Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL) or Canadian Standards
Association (CSA). Use only an extension cord that can be used
outdoors, in cold temperatures, and is clearly marked ⬙Suitable for Use
with Outdoor Appliances.⬙ Never use an indoor extension cord
outdoors; it could result in an electric shock or fire hazard.
• Use a 16 gauge outdoor extension cord, minimum.
• Use as short an extension cord as possible.
• Do not use multiple extension cords. Instead, use one extension cord
which is long enough to reach from the engine block heater cord to
the outlet without stretching.
• Make certain that the extension cord is in excellent condition (not
patched or spliced). Store your extension cord indoors at
temperatures above 32°F (0°C). Outdoor conditions can deteriorate
extension cords over a period of time.
• To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not use your heater with
ungrounded electrical systems or two pronged (cheater) adapters.
Also ensure that the block heater, especially the cord, is in good
condition before use.
• Make sure that when in operation, the extension cord plug /engine
block heater cord plug connection is free and clear of water in order
to prevent possible shock or fire.
• Be sure that areas where the vehicle is parked are clean and clear of
all combustibles such as petroleum products, dust, rags, paper and
similar items.
• Be sure that the engine block heater, heater cord and extension cord
are solidly connected. A poor connection can cause the cord to
become very hot and may result in an electrical shock or fire. Be sure
to check for heat anywhere in the electrical hookup once the system
has been operating for approximately a half hour.
• Finally, have the engine block heater system checked during your fall
tune-up to be sure it’s in good working order.
How to use the engine block heater
Ensure the receptacle terminals are clean and dry prior to use. To clean
them, use a dry cloth.
Depending on the type of factory installed equipment, your engine block
heater system may consume anywhere between 400 watts or 1000 watts
182
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Driving
of energy per hour. Your factory installed block heater system does not
have a thermostat; however, maximum temperature is attained after
approximately 3 hours of operation. Block heater operation longer than 3
hours will not improve system performance and will unnecessarily use
additional electricity.
Make sure system is unplugged and properly stowed before driving the
vehicle. While not in use, make sure the protective cover seals the
prongs of the engine block heater cord plug.
BRAKES
Occasional brake noise is normal. If a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding
or continuous squeal sound is present, the brake linings may be worn-out
and should be inspected by an authorized dealer. If the vehicle has
continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking, the
vehicle should be inspected by an authorized dealer.
Refer to Brake system warning
light in the Instrument Cluster ! P
chapter for information on the brake
system warning light. BRAKE
Four-wheel anti-lock brake system (ABS)
Your vehicle is equipped with an Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). This
system helps you maintain steering control during emergency stops by
keeping the brakes from locking. The ABS operates by detecting the
onset of wheel lockup during brake application and compensates for this
tendency. Noise from the ABS pump motor and brake pedal pulsation
may be observed during ABS braking; any pulsation or mechanical noise
you may feel or hear is normal. In addition, the ABS performs a
self-check after you start the engine and begin to drive away. A brief
mechanical noise may be heard during this test. This is normal.
ABS warning lamp
The ABS lamp in the instrument
cluster momentarily illuminates
when the ignition is turned on. If ABS
the light does not illuminate during
start up, remains on or flashes, the
ABS may be disabled and may need to be serviced.
183
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Driving
Even when the ABS is disabled and
the ABS light is on, normal braking ! P
is still effective. If your BRAKE
warning lamp illuminates with the BRAKE
parking brake released, have your
brake system serviced immediately.
Using ABS
When hard braking is required, apply continuous force on the brake
pedal; do not pump the brake pedal since this will reduce the
effectiveness of the ABS and will increase your vehicle’s stopping
distance. The ABS will be activated immediately, allowing you to retain
full steering control during hard braking and on slippery surfaces.
However, the ABS does not decrease stopping distance and does not
decrease the time necessary to apply the brakes.
Parking brake
To set the parking brake (1), pull
the parking brake handle up as far 2 1
as possible.
The BRAKE warning lamp will

illuminate and will remain ! P
illuminated until the parking brake
is released. BRAKE
To release, press and hold the button (2), pull the handle up slightly,
then push the handle down.
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure that the
gearshift is securely latched in P (Park).
If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake warning lamp
remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working properly.
See your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
184
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Driving
TRACTION CONTROL™
The Traction Control™ system helps you maintain the stability and
steerability of your vehicle, especially on slippery road surfaces such as
snow- or ice-covered roads and gravel roads. The system will allow your
vehicle to make better use of available traction in these conditions.
During Traction Control™ operation,
the traction control active light will
illuminate, you may hear an electric
motor type of sound coming from
the engine compartment, and the
engine may not “rev-up” when you
push further on the accelerator. This is normal system behavior and
should be no reason for concern.
Aggressive driving in any road conditions can cause you to lose
control of your vehicle increasing the risk of severe personal
injury or property damage. The occurrence of a Traction Control™
event is an indication that at least some of the tires have exceeded
their ability to grip the road; this may lead to an increased risk of loss
of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. If you
experience a severe road event, SLOW DOWN.
The Traction Control™ switch is

located on the instrument panel.
The Traction Control™ system will
automatically turn on every time the
ignition is turned off and on. The
Traction Control™ system should
normally be left on.
If you should become stuck in snow
or ice or on a very slippery road
surface, try switching the Traction
Control™ system off by pressing the
switch on the instrument panel. Switching the Traction Control™ system
off may allow excess wheel spin to “dig” the vehicle out and enable a
successful “rocking” maneuver. When the Traction Control™ system is
off, an indicator light will illuminate and will remain on until the system
is turned back on or the ignition is turned off and on. Remember to
switch the Traction Control™ system back on once the vehicle is no
longer stuck.
185
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Driving
If a system fault is detected, the traction control active light will
illuminate, the Traction Control™ button will not turn the system on or
off and your vehicle should be serviced by an authorized dealer.
STEERING
To help prevent damage to the power steering system:
• Never hold the steering wheel at its furthest turning points (until it
stops) for more than a few seconds when the engine is running.
• Do not operate the vehicle with a low power steering pump fluid level
(below the MIN mark on the reservoir).
• Some noise is normal during operation. If excessive, check for low
power steering pump fluid level before seeking service by your
authorized dealer.
• Heavy or uneven steering efforts may be caused by low power steering
pump fluid level. Check for low power steering pump fluid level before
seeking service by your authorized dealer.
• Do not fill the power steering pump reservoir above the MAX mark on
the reservoir, as this may result in leaks from the reservoir.
If the power steering system breaks down (or if the engine is turned
off), you can steer the vehicle manually, but it takes more effort.
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
• an improperly inflated tire
• uneven tire wear
• loose or worn suspension components
• loose or worn steering components
• improper steering alignment
A high crown in the road or high crosswinds may also make the steering
seem to wander/pull.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OPERATION
Brake-shift interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift interlock feature that prevents
the gearshift lever from being moved from P (Park) when the ignition is
in the RUN position unless brake pedal is depressed.
186
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Driving
If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P (Park) with ignition in
the RUN position and the brake pedal depressed:
1. Apply the parking brake, turn
ignition key to LOCK, then remove
the key.
2. Using a screwdriver (or similar
tool), remove the protective cover
to the interlock release access hole
on the console.
3. Insert the screwdriver (or similar
tool) into the access hole and press
downward while pulling the
gearshift lever out of the P (Park)
position and into the N (Neutral)
position.
4. Remove the tool and reinstall the
protective cover.
5. Start the vehicle and release the
parking brake.
If it is necessary to use the above procedure to move the gearshift lever,

it is possible that a fuse has blown or the vehicle’s brakelamps are not
operating properly. Refer to Fuses and relays in the Roadside
Emergencies chapter.
Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the brakelamps
are working.
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is
latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and
remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
See your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
187
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Driving
Understanding the gearshift positions of the 6–speed automatic
transaxle
P (Park)
This position locks the transaxle and prevents the front wheels from
turning.
To put your vehicle in gear:
• Depress the brake pedal
• Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear
To put your vehicle in P (Park):
• Come to a complete stop
• Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P (Park)
R (Reverse)
With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse), the vehicle will move backward.
Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R
(Reverse).
188
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Driving
N (Neutral)
With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), the vehicle can be started and is
free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this position.
D (Drive) with Overdrive
The normal driving position for the best fuel economy. Transaxle
operates in gears one through six.
D (Drive) without Overdrive
Overdrive can be deactivated by
pressing the transmission control
switch on the side of the gearshift
lever.
• This position allows for all
forward gears (1–4) except
overdrive.
• Provides engine braking.
• Use when driving conditions
cause excessive shifting from O/D
to other gears. Examples: city
traffic, hilly terrain, heavy loads,
trailer towing and when engine
braking is required.
• O/D OFF lamp in the instrument

cluster is illuminated.
O/D
OFF
• To return to O/D (overdrive mode), press the transmission control
switch. The O/D OFF lamp in the instrument cluster will not be
illuminated.
• O/D (overdrive) is automatically returned each time the key is turned
off.
189
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Driving
L (Low)
This position:
• Provides increased engine braking during downhill/mountain driving.
• Provides extended shift scheduling, allowing both upshifts and
downshifts, at a higher overall RPM to provide optimum engine
braking.
• Is not intended for use under extended or normal driving conditions
and results in lower fuel economy.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow, it may be rocked out by
shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts in a
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute or damage to the
transmission and tires may occur, or the engine may overheat.
REVERSE SENSING SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The Reverse Sensing System (RSS) sounds a tone to warn the driver of
obstacles near the rear bumper when the R (Reverse) is selected and the
vehicle is moving at speeds less than 3 mph (5 km/h). The system is not
effective at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h) and may not detect certain
angular or moving objects.
To help avoid personal injury, please read and understand the
limitations of the reverse sensing system as contained in this
section. Reverse sensing is only an aid for some (generally large and
fixed) objects when moving in reverse on a flat surface at “parking
speeds”. Inclement weather may also affect the function of the RSS;
this may include reduced performance or a false activation.
To help avoid personal injury, always use caution when in R

(Reverse) and when using the RSS.
This system is not designed to prevent contact with small or

moving objects. The system is designed to provide a warning to
assist the driver in detecting large stationary objects to avoid damaging
the vehicle. The system may not detect smaller objects, particularly
those close to the ground.
190
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Driving
Certain add-on devices such as large trailer hitches, bike or

surfboard racks and any device that may block the normal
detection zone of the RSS system may create false beeps.
The RSS detects obstacles up to six

feet (two meters) from the rear
bumper with a decreased coverage
area at the outer corners of the
bumper, (refer to the figures for
approximate zone coverage areas).
As you move closer to the obstacle,
the rate of the tone increases. When
the obstacle is less than 10 inches
(25.0 cm) away, the tone will sound
continuously. If the RSS detects a
stationary or receding object further
than 10 inches (25.0 cm) from the
side of the vehicle, the tone will
sound for only three seconds. Once
the system detects an object
approaching, the tone will sound
again.
While receiving a warning the radio volume will be reduced to a

predetermined level. After the warning goes away, the radio will return
to the previous value.
The RSS automatically turns on when the gear selector is placed in R
(Reverse) and the ignition is on. A control in the message center allows
the driver to disable the system only when the ignition is on and the
gear selector is in R (Reverse). Refer to Message center in the Driver
Controls chapter for more information.
Keep the RSS sensors (located on the rear bumper/fascia) free
from snow, ice and large accumulations of dirt (do not clean the
sensors with sharp objects). If the sensors are covered, it will
affect the accuracy of the RSS.
If your vehicle sustains damage to the rear bumper/fascia, leaving
it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered causing
inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms.
191
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Driving
ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a full-time All Wheel Drive (AWD)
system. With the AWD option, power will be delivered to the front
wheels and distributed to the rear wheels as needed. The AWD system is
active all the time and requires no input from the operator.
All components of the AWD system are sealed for life and require no
maintenance.
If your vehicle is equipped with AWD, a spare tire of a different size
other than the tire provided should never be used. A dissimilar spare tire
size (other than the spare tire provided) or major dissimilar tire sizes
between the front and rear axles could cause the AWD system to stop
functioning and default to front wheel drive.
Note: Your AWD vehicle is not intended for off-road use. The AWD
feature gives your vehicle some limited off-road capabilities in which
driving surfaces are relatively level, obstruction-free and otherwise
similar to normal on-road driving conditions. Operating your vehicle
under other than those conditions could subject the vehicle to excessive
stress which might result in damage which is not covered under your
warranty.
Driving off-highway with AWD vehicles
AWD vehicles are specially equipped for driving on sand, snow, mud and
rough roads and have operating characteristics that are somewhat
different from conventional vehicles, both on and off the highway.
When driving at slow speeds off-highway under high outside
temperatures, use L (Low) gear when possible. L (Low) gear operation
will maximize the engine and transmission cooling capability.
Under severe operating conditions, the A/C may cycle on and off to
protect overheating of the engine.
Basic operating principles
• Drive slower in strong crosswinds which can affect the normal steering
characteristics of your vehicle.
• Be extremely careful when driving on pavement made slippery by
loose sand, water, gravel, snow or ice.
If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement
• If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement, slow down, but
avoid severe brake application, ease the vehicle back onto the
pavement only after reducing your speed. Do not turn the steering
wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface.
192
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Driving
• It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow
down gradually before returning to the pavement. You may lose
control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too
sharply or abruptly.
• It often may be less risky to strike small objects, such as highway
reflectors, with minor damage to your vehicle rather than attempt a
sudden return to the pavement which could cause the vehicle to slide
sideways out of control or rollover. Remember, your safety and the
safety of others should be your primary concern.
If your vehicle gets stuck
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by
shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts, in a
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
If your vehicle is equipped with Traction Control™, it may be beneficial
to disengage the Traction Control™ system while attempting to rock the
vehicle.
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes or damage
to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may
overheat.
See your authorized dealer.
Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h). The tires may
fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
193
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Driving
Emergency maneuvers
• In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn
must be made, remember to avoid “over-driving” your vehicle (i.e.,
turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid
the emergency). Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control,
not more. Additionally, smooth variations of the accelerator and/or
brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are
called for. Avoid abrupt steering, acceleration or braking which could
result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover
and/or personal injury. Use all available road surface to return the
vehicle to a safe direction of travel.
• In the event of an emergency stop, avoid skidding the tires and do not
attempt any sharp steering wheel movements.
• If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another (i.e., from
concrete to gravel) there will be a change in the way the vehicle
responds to a maneuver (steering, acceleration or braking). Again,
avoid these abrupt inputs.
AWD Systems (if equipped)
AWD uses all four wheels to power the vehicle. This increases traction,
enabling you to drive over terrain and road conditions that a
conventional two-wheel drive vehicle cannot.
Sand
When driving over sand, try to keep all four wheels on the most solid
area of the trail. Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift to a lower
gear and drive steadily through the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly
and avoid spinning the wheels.
If your vehicle is equipped with an automatic transmission: When
driving at slow speeds in deep sand under high outside temperatures,
use L (Low) gear when possible. L (Low) gear operation will maximize
the engine and transmission cooling capability.
Under severe operating conditions, the A/C may cycle on and off to
protect overheating of the engine.
Avoid excessive speed because vehicle momentum can work against you
and cause the vehicle to become stuck to the point that assistance may
be required from another vehicle. Remember, you may be able to back
out the way you came if you proceed with caution.
Mud and water
If you must drive through high water, drive slowly. Traction or brake
capability may be limited.
194
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Driving
When driving through water, determine the depth; avoid water higher
than the bottom of the wheel rims (for cars) or the bottom of the hubs
(for trucks) (if possible) and proceed slowly. If the ignition system gets
wet, the vehicle may stall.
Once through water, always try the brakes. Wet brakes do not stop the
vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by moving
your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.
Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle speed or direction when you
are driving in mud. Even AWD vehicles can lose traction in slick mud. As
when you are driving over sand, apply the accelerator slowly and avoid
spinning your wheels. If the vehicle does slide, steer in the direction of
the slide until you regain control of the vehicle.
If the engine or transmission is submerged in water, their fluids should
be checked and changed, if necessary.
Driving through deep water may damage the engine or
transmission.
If the front or rear axle is submerged in water, the axle lubricant and
PTU (Power Transfer Unit) lubricant should be checked and changed if
necessary.
After driving through mud, clean off residue stuck to rotating driveshafts
and tires. Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts causes an
imbalance that could damage drive components.
“Tread Lightly” is an educational
program designed to increase public
awareness of land-use regulations
and responsibilities in our nations
wilderness areas. Ford Motor
Company joins the U.S. Forest Service and the Bureau of Land
Management in encouraging you to help preserve our national forest and
other public and private lands by “treading lightly.”
Driving on hilly or sloping terrain
Although natural obstacles may make it necessary to travel diagonally up
or down a hill or steep incline, you should always try to drive straight up
or straight down. Avoid driving crosswise or turning on steep
slopes or hills. A danger lies in losing traction, slipping sideways and
possibly rolling over. Whenever driving on a hill, determine beforehand
the route you will use. Do not drive over the crest of a hill without
seeing what conditions are on the other side. Do not drive in reverse
over a hill without the aid of an observer.
195
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Driving
When climbing a steep slope or hill, start in a lower gear rather than
downshifting to a lower gear from a higher gear once the ascent has
started. This reduces strain on the engine and the possibility of stalling.
If you do stall out, do not try to turnaround because you might roll over.
It is better to back down to a safe location.
Apply just enough power to the wheels to climb the hill. Too much
power will cause the tires to slip, spin or lose traction, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
Descend a hill in the same gear you
would use to climb up the hill to
avoid excessive brake application
and brake overheating. Do not
descend in neutral; instead,
disengage overdrive or manually
shift to a lower gear. When
descending a steep hill, avoid
sudden hard braking as you could
lose control. The front wheels have
to be turning in order to steer the
vehicle.
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, therefore apply the brakes steadily. Do
not “pump” the brakes.
Driving on snow and ice
Note: Excessive tire slippage can cause transaxle damage.
AWD vehicles have advantages over 2WD vehicles in snow and ice but
can skid like any other vehicle.
Should you start to slide while driving on snowy or icy roads, turn the
steering wheel in the direction of the slide until you regain control.
Avoid sudden applications of power and quick changes of direction on
snow and ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily when starting
from a full stop.
Avoid sudden braking as well. Although an AWD vehicle may accelerate
better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice, it won’t stop any
faster, because as in other vehicles, braking occurs at all four wheels. Do
not become overconfident as to road conditions.
196
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Driving
Make sure you allow sufficient distance between you and other vehicles
for stopping. Drive slower than usual and consider using one of the lower
gears. In emergency stopping situations, apply the brake steadily. Since
your vehicle is equipped with a four wheel anti-lock brake system (ABS),
do not “pump” the brakes. Refer to the Brakes section of this chapter
for additional information on the operation of the anti-lock brake system.
Maintenance and Modifications
The suspension and steering systems on your vehicle have been designed
and tested to provide predictable performance whether loaded or empty
and durable load carrying capability. For this reason, Ford Motor
Company strongly recommends that you do not make modifications such
as adding or removing parts (such as lift kits or stabilizer bars) or by
using replacement parts not equivalent to the original factory equipment.
Any modifications to a vehicle that raise the center of gravity can make
it more likely the vehicle will rollover as a result of a loss of control.
Ford Motor Company recommends that caution be used with any vehicle
equipped with a high load or device (such as ladder or luggage racks).
Failure to maintain your vehicle properly may void the warranty, increase
your repair cost, reduce vehicle performance and operational capabilities
and adversely affect driver and passenger safety. Frequent inspection of
vehicle chassis components is recommended if the vehicle is subjected to
heavy off-highway usage.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
If driving through deep or standing
water is unavoidable, proceed very
slowly especially when the depth is
not known. Never drive through
water that is higher than the bottom
of the wheel rims (for cars) or the
bottom of the hubs (for trucks).
When driving through water, traction or brake capability may be limited.

Also, water may enter your engine’s air intake and severely damage your
engine or your vehicle may stall. Driving through deep water where
the transmission vent tube is submerged may allow water into the
transmission and cause internal transmission damage.
Once through the water, always dry the brakes by moving your
vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.
Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as quickly as dry brakes.
197
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Getting roadside assistance
To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company
offers a complimentary roadside assistance program. This program is
separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The service is available:
• 24–hours, seven days a week
• for the coverage period listed on the Roadside Assistance Card
included in your Owner Guide portfolio.
Roadside assistance will cover:
• a flat tire change with a good spare (except vehicles that have been
supplied with a tire inflation kit)
• battery jump start
• lock-out assistance (key replacement cost is the customer’s
responsibility)
• fuel delivery – Independent Service Contractors, if not prohibited by
state, local or municipal law shall deliver up to 2.0 gallons (7.5L) of
gasoline or 5 gallons (18.9L) of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle. Fuel
delivery service is limited to two no-charge occurrences within a
12-month period.
• winch out – available within 100 feet (30.5 meters) of a paved or
county maintained road, no recoveries.
• towing – Ford/Mercury/Lincoln eligible vehicle towed to an authorized
dealer within 35 miles (56.3 km) of the disablement location or to the
nearest authorized dealer. If a member requests to be towed to an
authorized dealer more than 35 miles (56.3 km) from the disablement
location, the member shall be responsible for any mileage costs in
excess of 35 miles (56.3 km).
Trailers shall be covered up to $200 if the disabled eligible vehicle
requires service at the nearest authorized dealer. If the trailer is disabled,
but the towing vehicle is operational, the trailer does not qualify for any
roadside services.
Canadian customers refer to your Customer Information Guide
for information on:
• coverage period
• exact fuel amounts
• towing of your disabled vehicle
• emergency travel expense reimbursement
• travel planning benefits
198
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Using roadside assistance
Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. In the United States, this card is found in the
Owner Guide portfolio in the glove compartment. In Canada, the card is
found in the Customer Information Guide in the glove compartment.
U.S. Ford or Mercury vehicle customers who require roadside assistance,
call 1–800–241–3673; Lincoln vehicle customers call 1–800–521–4140.
Canadian customers who require roadside assistance, call
1–800–665–2006.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself, Ford Motor
Company will reimburse a reasonable amount for towing to the nearest
dealership within 35 miles. To obtain reimbursement information, U.S.
Ford, Mercury and Lincoln vehicle customers call 1-800-241-3673.
Customers will be asked to submit their original receipts.
Canadian customers who need to obtain reimbursement information, call
1–800–665–2006.
Roadside coverage beyond basic warranty
In the United States, you may purchase additional roadside assistance
coverage beyond this period through the Ford Auto Club by contacting
your authorized dealer or by calling 1–800–FORD–CLUB.
Similarly in Canada, for uninterrupted Roadside Assistance coverage, you
may purchase extended coverage prior to your Basic Warranty’s Roadside
Assistance expiring. For more information and enrollment, contact
1–877–294–2582 or visit our website at www.ford.ca.
HAZARD FLASHER CONTROL

The hazard flasher is located on the
instrument panel by the radio. The
hazard flashers will operate when
the ignition is in any position or if
the key is not in the ignition.
Push in the flasher control and all
front and rear direction signals will flash. Press the flasher control again
to turn them off. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a
safety hazard for other motorists.
Note: With extended use, the flasher may run down your battery.
199
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
FUEL PUMP SHUT-OFF SWITCH
This device stops the electric fuel pump from sending fuel to the engine
when your vehicle has had a substantial jolt.
After an accident, if the engine cranks but does not start, this switch
may have been activated.
The fuel pump shut-off switch is
located in the front passenger
footwell area in the right upper
corner.
To reset the switch:
1. Turn the ignition to 1 (LOCK).
2. Check the fuel system for leaks.
3. If no leaks are apparent, reset the
switch by pushing in on the reset
button.
4. Turn the ignition to 3 (RUN).
5. Wait a few seconds and return
the key to 1 (LOCK).
6. Make another check for leaks.
FUSES AND RELAYS
Fuses
If electrical components in the
vehicle are not working, a fuse may
have blown. Blown fuses are
identified by a broken wire within
the fuse. Check the appropriate 15
fuses before replacing any electrical

components.
Note: Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage
rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire
damage and could start a fire.
200
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Standard fuse amperage rating and color
COLOR
Cartridge
Fuse Mini Standard Maxi Fuse link
maxi
rating fuses fuses fuses cartridge
fuses
2A Grey Grey — — —
3A Violet Violet — — —
4A Pink Pink — — —
5A Tan Tan — — —
7.5A Brown Brown — — —
10A Red Red — — —
15A Blue Blue — — —
20A Yellow Yellow Yellow Blue Blue
25A Natural Natural — — —
30A Green Green Green Pink Pink
40A — — Orange Green Green
50A — — Red Red Red
60A — — Blue Yellow Yellow
70A — — Tan — Brown
80A — — Natural Black Black
Passenger compartment fuse panel

The fuse panel is located below and to the left of the steering wheel by
the brake pedal. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses.
To remove a fuse use the fuse puller tool provided on the fuse panel
cover.
201
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
The fuses are coded as follows.

Fuse/Relay Fuse Amp Passenger Compartment Fuse
Location Rating Panel Description
1 10A Backup lamps, Electrochromatic
mirror
2 20A Horns
3 15A Battery saver: Interior lamps,
Puddle lamps, Trunk lamp, Glove
box lamp, Rear power windows
4 15A Parklamps, License plate lamps
5 — Not used
6 — Not used
7 — Not used
8 30A Rear window defroster
9 10A Heated mirrors
10 30A Starter coil, PCM
11 15A High beams
202
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Fuse/Relay Fuse Amp Passenger Compartment Fuse

Location Rating Panel Description
12 7.5A Delay accessories: Radio head units,
Moon roof, Front power windows,
Electrochromatic mirrors, Ambient
lighting
13 7.5A Cluster, Analog clock, Climate
control head units
14 15A Washer pump
15 20A Cigar lighter
16 15A Door lock actuator, Decklid lock
solenoid
17 20A Not used (Spare)
18 20A Radio head units, OBDII connector
19 7.5A Not used (Spare)
20 7.5A Power mirrors, Satellite radio
module, All wheel drive
21 7.5A Stop lamps, CHMSL
22 7.5A Audio
23 7.5A Wiper relay coil, Cluster logic
24 7.5A OCS (Passenger’s seat), PAD
indicator
25 7.5A RCM
26 7.5A PATS Transceiver, Brake shift
interlock solenoid, Brake pedal
switch, Automatic transmission
module
27 7.5A Cluster, Climate control head units
28 10A ABS/Traction Control, Heated seats,
Compass, Reverse sensing system
C/B 30A Circuit Moon roof, Delayed accessory (SJB
Breaker fuse 12, rear power windows)
203
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Power distribution box
The power distribution box is located in the engine compartment. The
power distribution box contains high-current fuses that protect your
vehicle’s main electrical systems from overloads.
Always disconnect the battery before servicing high current
fuses.
To reduce risk of electrical shock, always replace the cover to

the Power Distribution Box before reconnecting the battery or
refilling fluid reservoirs.
If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, refer to the

Battery section of the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
50 51 52
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 53 54 55
36
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 37
38
39 56 57 58
41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 40
The high-current fuses are coded as follows.

Fuse/Relay Fuse Amp Power Distribution Box
Location Rating Description
1 60A*** SJB power feed (fuses 12, 13, 14,
15, 16, 17, 18, C/B)
2 60A*** SJB power feed (fuses 1, 2, 4, 10,
11)
204
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)

3 40A** Powertrain power, PCM relay coil
4 40A** Blower motor
5 — Not used
6 40A** Rear window defroster, Heated
mirrors
7 — Not used
8 40A** ABS pump
9 20A** Wipers
10 30A** ABS Valves
11 30A** Heated seats, Passenger
heated/cooled seat
12 30A** Driver heated/cooled seat
13 10A* SYNC
14 15A* Ignition switch
15 10A* Memory module logic
16 15A* Transmission
17 10A* Alternator sense
18 — Not used
19 40A** Logic feed to SJB (solid state
devices)
20 20A** THXII Amplifier #1
21 20A** THXII Amplifier #2
22 20A** Console power point
23 10A* PCM KAM and canister vent
solenoid
24 15A* Fog lamps
25 10A* A/C Compressor clutch
26 15A* LH HID Low beam
27 15A* RH HID Low beam
28 80A*** Engine cooling fan
29 — Not used
30 30A** Fuel pump/injectors relay
205
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)

31 30A** Passenger power seat
32 30A** Driver power seat
33 20A** Moon roof
34 30A** Driver Smart power window
35 30A** Passenger Smart power window
36 1A* PCM diode
37 1A* One Touch Integrated Start
(OTIS) diode
38 — Not used
39 — Not used
40 — Not used
41 Relay Fog lamp relay
42 Relay Wiper park relay
43 Relay A/C clutch relay
44 — Not used
45 — Not used
46 15A* Injectors
47 15A* PCM class B
48 15A* Coil on plug
49 15A* PCM class C
50 Full ISO Relay LH HID low beam relay
51 Full ISO Relay RH HID low beam relay
52 Full ISO Relay Blower relay
53 — Not used
54 Full ISO Relay Fuel pump/injectors relay
55 Full ISO Relay Wiper RUN relay
56 — Not used
57 Full ISO Relay PCM relay
58 — Not used
*Mini fuses **A1 fuses ***A3 fuses
206
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
CHANGING THE TIRES
If you get a flat tire while driving, do not apply the brake heavily.
Instead, gradually decrease your speed. Hold the steering wheel firmly
and slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road.
Note: The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) indicator light will
illuminate when the spare tire is in use. To restore the full functionality
of the monitoring system, all road wheels equipped with tire pressure
monitoring sensors must be mounted on the vehicle.
Have a flat serviced by an authorized dealer in order to prevent damage
to the TPMS sensors, refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter. Replace the spare
tire with a road tire as soon as possible.
The use of tire sealants may damage your Tire Pressure
Monitoring System and should not be used.
Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) in the

Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter for important information. If
the tire pressure monitor sensor becomes damaged, it will no longer
function.
Dissimilar spare tire/wheel information

Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an increased
risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
If you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel, then it is intended for

temporary use only. This means that if you need to use it, you should
replace it as soon as possible with a road tire/wheel that is the same size
and type as the road tires and wheels that were originally provided by
Ford. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is damaged, it should be
replaced rather than repaired.
A dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that
is different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels
and can be one of three types:
1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire begins with the letter “T” for tire
size and may have “Temporary Use Only” molded in the sidewall
2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label on wheel: This spare tire has
a label on the wheel that states: “THIS TIRE AND WHEEL FOR
TEMPORARY USE ONLY”
207
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
When driving with one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above, do not:
• Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)
• Load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle load rating listed on the
Safety Compliance Label
• Tow a trailer
• Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare
tire
• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire at a time
• Use commercial car washing equipment
• Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire
Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above at any one wheel
location can lead to impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking performance
• Comfort and noise
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs
• Winter weather driving capability
• Wet weather driving capability
3. Full-size dissimilar spare without label on wheel
When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel, do not:
• Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h)
• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire/wheel at a time
• Use commercial car washing equipment
• Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare
tire/wheel
The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel can lead to
impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking performance
• Comfort and noise
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs
• Winter weather driving capability
• Wet weather driving capability
• All-Wheel driving capability (if applicable)
• Load leveling adjustment (if applicable)
208
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel additional
caution should be given to:
• Towing a trailer
• Driving vehicles equipped with a camper body
• Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo rack
Drive cautiously when using a full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel and
seek service as soon as possible.
Stopping and securing the vehicle
1. Park on a level surface, set the parking brake and activate the hazard
flashers.
2. Place the gearshift lever in P (Park) and turn the engine off.
Removing the spare tire and jack
1. Remove the carpeted load floor
panel located in the rear of the
vehicle and remove the lug wrench
and long bolt from the tool bag.
2. Remove the bolt securing the
spare tire using the lug wrench,
then lift and remove the spare tire
from the trunk.
3. Remove the jack retention bolt by
turning it counterclockwise and
remove the jack from the vehicle.
209
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Tire change procedure
To help prevent the vehicle from moving when you change a tire,
be sure the parking brake is set, then block (in both directions)
the wheel that is diagonally opposite (other side and end of the
vehicle) to the tire being changed.
If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone else could be
seriously injured.
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close

to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the
danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel.
Note: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is
being jacked.
1. Block both the front and rear of
the wheel diagonally opposite the
flat tire. For example, if the left
front tire is flat, block the right rear
wheel.
2. Remove the center ornament (if

equipped) from the wheel. Loosen
each wheel lug nut one-half turn
counterclockwise but do not remove
them until the wheel is raised off
the ground.
210
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
3. Put the jack in the jack locator
next to the tire you are changing.
Turn the jack handle clockwise until
the wheel is completely off the
ground.
To lessen the risk of
personal injury, do not put
any part of your body under the
vehicle while changing a tire. Do
not start the engine when your
vehicle is on the jack. The jack is
only meant for changing the tire.
4. Remove the lug nuts with the lug

wrench.
5. Replace the flat tire with the
spare tire, making sure the valve
stem is facing outward. Reinstall lug
nuts until the wheel is snug against
the hub. Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has been
lowered.
If you are using the temporary tire, the lug nut washers will not appear
to be flush with the rim. This is normal only when using the temporary
spare tire.
6. Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.
7. Remove the jack and fully tighten 1
the lug nuts in the order shown.
Refer to Wheel lug nut torque
specifications later in this chapter
for the proper lug nut torque 3 4
specification.
8. Unblock the wheels.
5 2
211
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Stowing the wheel and jack
1. Fully collapse the jack and place it back in the storage area in the
trunk.
2. Replace the jack retention bolt to secure the jack.
3. Place the tire in the storage bin in the trunk.
4. Replace the cover plate and bolt.
• When storing a flat road tire, flip the cover plate over and use the long
bolt.
• When storing the temporary spare tire, replace the cover plate and
use the short bolt.
5. Secure the bolt using the lug wrench.
6. Insert the lug wrench and bolt in the tool bag and place over the jack.
7. Replace the carpeted load floor panel.
WHEEL LUG NUT TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS

Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque at 500 miles (800 km)
after any wheel disturbance (tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel
removal, etc.).
Bolt size Wheel lug nut torque*
lb. ft. N•m
M12 x 1.5 100 135
* Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and
rust. Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners.
When a wheel is installed, always remove any corrosion, dirt or

foreign materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel
or the surface of the wheel hub, brake drum or brake disc that
contacts the wheel. Ensure that any fasteners that attach the rotor to
the hub are secured so they do not interfere with the mounting
surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal
contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to
loosen and the wheel to come off while the vehicle is in motion,
resulting in loss of control.
212
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Note: Inspect the wheel pilot hole
prior to installation. If there is
visible corrosion in wheel pilot hole,
remove loose particles by wiping
with clean rag and apply grease.
Apply grease only to the wheel pilot
hole surface by smearing a “dime”
(1 square cm) sized glob of grease
around the wheel pilot surface (1)
with end of finger. DO NOT apply
grease to lugnut/stud holes or
wheel-to-brake surfaces.
JUMP STARTING
The gases around the battery can explode if exposed to flames,
sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could result in injury or
vehicle damage.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin, eyes and
clothing, if contacted.
Do not attempt to push-start your automatic transmission

vehicle. Automatic transmissions do not have push-start
capability. Attempting to push-start a vehicle with an automatic
transmission may cause transmission damage.
Preparing your vehicle
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the
automatic transmission must relearn its shift strategy. As a result, the
transmission may have firm and/or soft shifts. This operation is
considered normal and will not affect function or durability of the
transmission. Over time, the adaptive learning process will fully update
transmission operation.
1. Use only a 12–volt supply to start your vehicle.
2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could
damage the vehicle’s electrical system.
3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle
making sure the two vehicles do not touch. Set the parking brake on
both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving
parts.
213
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
4. Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion before
you attach the battery cables. Ensure that vent caps are tight and level.
5. Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect from any electrical
surges. Turn all other accessories off.
Connecting the jumper cables
–
+
–
+
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of
the discharged battery.
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the
assisting (boosting) battery.
–
+
–
+
2. Connect the other end of the positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the assisting battery.
214
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
+
–
+
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal of the
assisting battery.
–
+
–
+
4. Make the final connection of the negative (-) cable to an exposed

metal part of the stalled vehicle’s engine, away from the battery and the
carburetor/fuel injection system. Do not use fuel lines, engine rocker
covers or the intake manifold as grounding points.
Do not connect the end of the second cable to the negative (-)
terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark may cause an
explosion of the gases that surround the battery.
5. Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades, belts, moving parts of
both engines, or any fuel delivery system parts.
215
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Jump starting
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at
moderately increased speed.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been started, run both engines for an
additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables.
Removing the jumper cables
–
+
–
+
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were
connected.
1. Remove the jumper cable from the ground metal surface.
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the
assisting (boosting) battery.
–
+
–
+
2. Remove the jumper cable on the negative (-) connection of the

booster vehicle’s battery.
216
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
+
–
+
3. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the booster
vehicle’s battery.
–
+
–
+
4. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the
disabled vehicle’s battery.
After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables
removed, allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can
relearn its idle conditions.
217
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
WRECKER TOWING
If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional towing

service or, if you are a member of a roadside assistance program, your
roadside assistance service provider.
It is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift or flatbed
equipment. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford Motor Company has not
approved a slingbelt towing procedure.
If the vehicle is towed by other means or incorrectly, vehicle
damage may occur.
If your vehicle is to be towed using wheel lift equipment, the non-lifted
wheels must be placed on a dolly to prevent damage to the vehicle.
Place a rag on top of the hoist cable below the fascia when loading or
unloading a vehicle on a flatbed wrecker to prevent surface damage to
the fascia.
Ford Motor Company produces a towing manual for all authorized tow
truck operators. Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for
proper hook-up and towing procedures for your vehicle.
218
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Emergency Towing
In case of a roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle (without access
to wheel dollies, car hauling trailer, or flatbed transport vehicle) your
vehicle (regardless of transmission powertrain configuration) can be flat
towed (all wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:
• Vehicle is facing forward.
• Place the transmission in N (Neutral).
• Maximum speed is not to exceed 35 mph (56 km/h).
• Maximum distance is 50 miles (80 km).
219
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED
At home
You must take your Lincoln or Mercury vehicle to an authorized dealer
for warranty repairs. While any authorized dealer handling your vehicle
line will provide warranty service, we recommend you return to your
selling authorized dealer who wants to ensure your continued
satisfaction. Please note that certain warranty repairs require special
training and/or equipment, so not all authorized dealers are authorized to
perform all warranty repairs. This means that, depending on the
warranty repair needed, you may have to take your vehicle to another
authorized dealer. A reasonable time must be allowed to perform a repair
after taking your vehicle to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be made
using Ford or Motorcraft parts, or remanufactured or other parts that are
authorized by Ford.
If you have questions or concerns, or are unsatisfied with the service you
are receiving, follow these steps:
1. Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your
selling/servicing authorized dealer.
2. If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved, contact the Sales
Manager, Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager.
3. If you require assistance or clarification on Ford Motor Company
policies or procedures, please contact the Lincoln Mercury Customer
Relationship Center at 1-800-521-4140.
Away from home
If you own a Ford or Mercury vehicle and are away from home when
your vehicle needs service, or if you need more help than the authorized
dealer could provide, after following the steps described above, contact
the Ford Customer Relationship Center to find an authorized dealer to
help you.
In the United States:
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48121
1-800-392-3673 (FORD)
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952)
www.customersaskford.com
220
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
In Canada:
Customer Relationship Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
www.ford.ca
If you own a Lincoln vehicle and are away from home when your vehicle
needs service, or if you need more help than the authorized dealer could
provide, after following the steps described above, contact the Ford
Customer Relationship Center to find an authorized dealer to help you.
In the United States:
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48121
1-800-521-4140
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952)
www.customersaskford.com
In Canada:
Lincoln Centre
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
1-800-387-9333
www.lincolncanada.com
In order to help you service your Lincoln vehicle, please have the
following information available when contacting the Lincoln Centre:
• Your telephone number (home and business)
• The name of the authorized dealer and the city where the authorized
dealer is located
• The year and make of your vehicle
• The date of vehicle purchase
• The current odometer reading
• The vehicle identification number (VIN)
Additional Assistance
If you still have a complaint involving a warranty dispute, you may wish
to contact the Better Business Bureau (BBB) AUTO LINE program (U.S.
only).
221
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
In some states (in the U.S.) you must directly notify Ford in writing
before pursuing remedies under your state’s warranty laws. Ford is also
allowed a final repair attempt in some states.
In the United States, a warranty dispute must be submitted to the BBB
AUTO LINE before taking action under the Magnuson-Moss Warranty
Act, or to the extent allowed by state law, before pursuing replacement
or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws. This dispute
handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state created rights
or other rights which are independent of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty
Act or state replacement or repurchase laws.
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d) requires that, if a manufacturer
or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the
vehicle’s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of
attempts, the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the
vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or
payable by the consumer (less a reasonable allowance for consumer
use). The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund
or replacement vehicle.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) presumes that the manufacturer
has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its
applicable express warranties if, within the first 18 months of ownership
of a new vehicle or the first 18,000 miles (29,000 km), whichever occurs
first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are made on the same non-conformity
likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity (a
defect or condition that substantially impairs the use, value or safety of
the vehicle) OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of
more than 30 calendar days (not necessarily all at one time)
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer must also notify the
manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the
following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
222
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
THE BETTER BUSINESS BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE PROGRAM
(U.S. ONLY)
Your satisfaction is important to Ford Motor Company and to your dealer.
Experience has shown that our customers have been very successful in
achieving satisfaction by following the three-step procedure outlined on
the front page of the Warranty Guide. However, if your warranty concern
has not been resolved using the three-step procedure, you may be
eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO LINE program.
The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of two parts – mediation and
arbitration. Initially, the BBB will try to resolve your question or concern
through mediation. Mediation is a process through which a
representative of the BBB will contact the parties and explore options
for settlement of your claim. If mediation is not successful, customers
with eligible claims may participate in the BBB AUTO LINE arbitration
process. An arbitration hearing will be scheduled so that you can present
your case in an informal setting before an impartial person. The
arbitrator will consider the testimony provided and make a decision after
the hearing. You are not bound by the decision but may choose to accept
it. If you choose to accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision then Ford must
abide by the accepted decision as well. If the arbitrator has decided in
your favor and you accept the decision, the BBB AUTO LINE program
will contact you to ensure that Ford has complied with the decision in a
timely manner. Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE program are
usually decided within forty days after you file your claim with the BBB.
To initiate a claim with the BBB AUTO LINE, you will be asked for your
name and address, general information about your new vehicle,
information about your warranty concerns and any steps you have
already taken to try to resolve them. You will then be mailed a Customer
Claim Form that you will need to complete, provide proof of vehicle
ownership, sign and return the Customer Claim Form to the BBB. Upon
receipt, the BBB will review the claim for eligibility under the Program
Summary Guidelines.
You can get more information by calling BBB AUTO LINE at
1–800–955–5100, or writing to:
BBB AUTO LINE
4200 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 800
Arlington, Virginia 22203–1833
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility
limitations, modify procedures, or to discontinue this process at any time
without notice and without obligation.
223
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
UTILIZING THE MEDIATION/ARBITRATION PROGRAM
(CANADA ONLY)
For vehicles delivered to authorized Canadian dealers. In those cases
where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of Canada and the
authorized dealer to resolve a factory-related vehicle service concern
have been unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada participates in an impartial
third party mediation/arbitration program administered by the Canadian
Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
The CAMVAP program is a straight-forward and relatively speedy
alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a
settlement have failed. This procedure is without cost to you and is
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal
proceedings.
In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party arbitrators conduct
hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal
environment. These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the
parties, make decisions and, when appropriate, render awards to resolve
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair, and final as the arbitrator’s
award is binding both to you and Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all territories and provinces. For more
information, without charge or obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial
Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685.
FORD EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN
You can get more protection for your new car or light truck by
purchasing Ford Extended Service Plan (Ford ESP) coverage. It provides
the following:
• Benefits during the warranty period depending on the plan you
purchase (such as: reimbursement for rentals; coverage for certain
maintenance and wear items).
• Protection against covered repair costs after your Bumper-to-Bumper
Warranty expires.
You may purchase Ford ESP from any participating authorized dealer.
There are several plans available in various time, distance and deductible
combinations which can be tailored to fit your own driving needs. Ford
ESP also offers reimbursement benefits for towing and rental coverage.
When you buy Ford ESP, you receive Peace-of-Mind protection
throughout the United States and Canada, provided by a network of
more than 4,600 participating authorized dealers.
224
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
If you did not take advantage of the Ford Extended Service Plan at the
time of purchasing your vehicle, you may still be eligible. Since this
information is subject to change, please ask your authorized dealer for
complete details about Ford Extended Service Plan coverage options, or
visit the Ford ESP website at www.ford-esp.com.
GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country, contact the
appropriate foreign embassy or consulate. These officials can inform you
of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel.
If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti-knock
index lower than is recommended for your vehicle, contact a regional
office or owner relations/customer relationship office.
The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may
damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause
engine knocking or serious engine damage. Ford Motor Company/Ford of
Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper
fuel. Using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty importing your vehicle
back into the U.S.
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in
Central America, the Caribbean, or the Middle East, contact the nearest
authorized dealer. If the authorized dealer cannot help you, write or call:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
FORD EXPORT OPERATIONS
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (313) 594-4857
FAX: (313) 390-0804
If you are in another foreign country, contact the nearest authorized
dealer. If the authorized dealer employees cannot help you, they can
direct you to the nearest Ford affiliate office.
If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate outside of
the U.S. or Canada, register your vehicle identification number (VIN) and
new address with Ford Motor Company Export Operations.
Customers in the U.S. should call 1–800–392–3673.
225
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER’S LITERATURE
To order the publications in this portfolio, contact Helm, Incorporated at:
HELM, INCORPORATED
P.O. Box 07150
Detroit, Michigan 48207
Or call:
For a free publication catalog, order toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached by their website:
www.helminc.com.
(Items in this catalog may be purchased by credit card, check or
money order.)
Obtaining a French owner’s guide
French Owner’s Guides can be obtained from your authorized dealer or
by writing to:
Service Publications CHQ202
The Canadian Road
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, ON, Canada
L6J 5E4
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a crash
or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and
if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Ford Motor
Company.
226
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov;
or write to:
Administrator
1200 New Jersey Avenue, Southeast
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport
Canada, using their toll-free number: 1–800–333–0510.
227
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Cleaning
WASHING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral
pH shampoo, such as Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3-A), which is available
from your authorized dealer.
• Never use strong household detergents or soap, such as dish washing
or laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted
surfaces.
• Never wash a vehicle that is “hot to the touch” or during exposure to
strong, direct sunlight.
• Always use a clean sponge or car wash mitt with plenty of water for
best results.
• Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to
eliminate water spotting.
• It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the
winter months, as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and cause
damage to the vehicle.
• Immediately remove items such as gasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings
and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle’s
paintwork and trim over time. Use Bug and Tar Remover (ZC-42)
which is available from your authorized dealer.
• Remove any exterior accessories, such as antennas, before entering a
car wash.
• Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted
surface; if these substances come in contact with your vehicle,
wash off as soon as possible.
Exterior chrome
• Wash the vehicle first, using cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH
shampoo, such as Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3-A).
• Use Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (ZC-15), available from your
authorized dealer. Apply the product as you would a wax to clean
bumpers and other chrome parts; allow the cleaner to dry for a few
minutes, then wipe off the haze with a clean, dry rag.
• Never use abrasive materials such as steel wool or plastic pads
as they can scratch the chrome surface.
• After polishing chrome bumpers, apply a coating of Motorcraft
Premium Liquid Wax (ZC-53-A), available from your authorized dealer,
or an equivalent quality product to help protect from environmental
effects.
228
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Cleaning
WAXING
• Wash the vehicle first.
• Do not use waxes that contain abrasives; use Motorcraft Premium
Liquid Wax (ZC-53-A), which is available from your authorized dealer,
or an equivalent quality product.
• Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non-body
(low-gloss black) colored trim, such as grained door handles, roof
racks, bumpers, side moldings, mirror housings or the windshield cowl
area. The paint sealant will “gray” or stain the parts over time.
PAINT CHIPS
Your authorized dealer has touch-up paint to match your vehicle’s color.
Take your color code (printed on a sticker in the driver’s door jamb) to
your authorized dealer to ensure you get the correct color.
• Remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots, road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips.
• Always read the instructions before using the products.
ALUMINUM WHEELS AND WHEEL COVERS
Aluminum wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clearcoat paint
finish. In order to maintain their shine:
• Clean weekly with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37-A),
which is available from your authorized dealer. Heavy dirt and brake
dust accumulation may require agitation with a sponge. Rinse
thoroughly with a strong stream of water.
• Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or
covers.
• Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your
wheel rims or covers. Chemical-strength cleaners, or cleaning
chemicals, in combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust
and dirt, could wear away the clearcoat finish over time.
• Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel
cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergent.
• To remove tar and grease, use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover
(ZC-42), available from your authorized dealer.
229
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Cleaning
ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt
buildup keep the engine warmer than normal. When washing:
• Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine. The
high-pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause
damage.
• Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the
engine block or other engine components.
• Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (ZC-20) on all parts
that require cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In Canada use
Motorcraft Engine Shampoo (CXC-66-A).
• Cover the highlighted areas to prevent water damage when cleaning
the engine.
• Never wash or rinse the engine while it is running; water in the

running engine may cause internal damage.
230
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Cleaning
PLASTIC (NON-PAINTED) EXTERIOR PARTS
Use only approved products to clean plastic parts. These products are
available from your authorized dealer.
• For routine cleaning, use Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3-A).
• If tar or grease spots are present, use Motorcraft Bug and Tar
Remover (ZC-42).
• For plastic headlamp lenses, use Motorcraft Ultra Clear Spray Glass
Cleaner (ZC-23).
WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES
The windshield, rear and side windows and the wiper blades should be
cleaned regularly. If the wipers do not wipe properly, substances on the
vehicle’s glass or the wiper blades may be the cause. These may include
hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes, water repellent
coatings, tree sap, or other organic contamination; these contaminants
may cause squeaking or chatter noise from the blades, and streaking and
smearing of the windshield. To clean these items, follow these tips:
• The windshield, rear windows and side windows may be cleaned with
a non-abrasive cleaner such as Motorcraft Ultra-Clear Spray Glass
Cleaner (ZC-23), available from your authorized dealer.
• The wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol or
Motorcraft Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate (ZC-32-A),
available from your authorized dealer. This washer fluid contains
special solution in addition to alcohol which helps to remove the hot
wax deposited on the wiper blade and windshield from automated car
wash facilities. Be sure to replace wiper blades when they appear
worn or do not function properly.
• Do not use abrasives, as they may cause scratches.
• Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean any parts.
If you cannot remove those streaks after cleaning with the glass cleaner
or if the wipers chatter and move in a jerky motion, clean the outer
surface of the windshield and the wiper blades using a sponge or soft
cloth with a neutral detergent or mild-abrasive cleaning solution. After
cleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper blades with clean water. The
windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse the windshield
with water.
Do not use sharp objects, such as a razor blade, to clean the
inside of the rear window or to remove decals, as it may cause
damage to the rear window defroster’s heated grid lines.
231
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Cleaning
INSTRUMENT PANEL/INTERIOR TRIM AND CLUSTER LENS
Clean the instrument panel, interior trim areas and cluster lens with a
clean and damp white cotton cloth, then with a clean and dry white
cotton cloth; you may also use Motorcraft Dash & Vinyl Cleaner
(ZC-38-A) on the instrument panel and interior trim areas.
• Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase the gloss of the upper portion
of the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect the
driver from undesirable windshield reflection.
• Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in
contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan
lotion in order to avoid possible damage to the interior painted
surfaces.
• Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the
finish of the instrument panel, interior trim and cluster lens.
Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning
the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid contamination of
the airbag system.
If a staining liquid like coffee/juice has been spilled on the instrument

panel or on interior trim surfaces, clean as follows:
1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean, white, cotton cloth.
2. Apply Motorcraft Deluxe Leather and Vinyl Cleaner (ZC-11-A) [In
Canada use Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Cleaner (CXC-101)] to the wiped
area and spread around evenly.
3. Apply more Motorcraft cleaner to a clean, white, cotton cloth and
press the cloth onto the soiled area–allow this to set at room
temperature for 30 minutes.
4. Remove the soaked cloth, and if it is not soiled badly, use this cloth to
clean the area by using a rubbing motion for 60 seconds.
5. Following this, wipe area dry with a clean, white, cotton cloth.
INTERIOR
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, safety belts and seats equipped with side
airbags:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.
• Remove light stains and soil with Motorcraft Professional Strength
Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54).
232
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Cleaning
• If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area first
with Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (ZC-14). In Canada, use
Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Cleaner (CXC-101).
• If a ring forms on the fabric after spot cleaning, clean the entire area
immediately (but do not oversaturate) or the ring will set.
• Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can
stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of
the seat materials.
Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach or dye on the vehicle’s
safety belts, as these actions may weaken the belt webbing.
On vehicles equipped with seat-mounted airbags, do not use

chemical solvents or strong detergents. Such products could
contaminate the side-airbag system and affect performance of the side
airbag in a collision.
LEATHER SEATS
Your leather seating surfaces have a clear, protective coating over the
leather.
• To clean, use a soft cloth with Motorcraft Deluxe Leather and Vinyl
Cleaner (ZC-11-A). In Canada, use Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner (CXC-93).
Dry the area with a soft cloth.
• To help maintain its resiliency and color, use the Motorcraft Deluxe
Leather Care Kit (ZC-11-D), available from your authorized dealer. In
Canada, use Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner (CXC-93) or an equivalent
high–quality leather care product.
• Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or
cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl and plastics, or oil/petroleum-based
leather conditioners. These products may cause premature wearing of
the clear, protective coating.
Note: In some instances, color or dye transfer can occur when wet
clothing comes in contact with leather upholstery. If this occurs, the
leather should be cleaned immediately to avoid permanent staining.
UNDERBODY
Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently. Keep body and
door drain holes free from packed dirt.
233
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Cleaning
FORD AND LINCOLN MERCURY CAR CARE PRODUCTS
Your Ford or Lincoln Mercury authorized dealer has many quality
products available to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes. These
quality products have been specifically engineered to fulfill your
automotive needs; they are custom designed to complement the style
and appearance of your vehicle. Each product is made from high quality
materials that meet or exceed rigid specifications. For best results, use
the following products or products of equivalent quality:
Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover (ZC-42)
Motorcraft Car Wash (Canada only) (CXC-21)
Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (ZC-15)
Motorcraft Custom Clear Coat Polish (ZC-8-A)
Motorcraft Custom Vinyl Protectant (ZC-40-A)
Motorcraft Dash and Vinyl Cleaner (ZC-38-A)
Motorcraft Deluxe Leather and Vinyl Cleaner (U.S. only) (ZC-11-A)
Motorcraft Leather Care Kit (U.S. only) (ZC-11-D)
Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3-A)
Motorcraft Dusting Cloth (ZC-24)
Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (U.S. only) (ZC-20)
Motorcraft Engine Shampoo (Canada only) (CXC-66-A)
Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-101)
Motorcraft Premium Glass Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-100)
Motorcraft Premium Liquid Wax (ZC-53-A)
Motorcraft Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate (U.S. only)
(ZC-32-A)
Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54)
Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (U.S. only) (ZC-14)
Motorcraft Tire Clean and Shine (ZC-28)
Motorcraft Triple Clean (U.S. only) (ZC-13)
Motorcraft Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (ZC-23)
Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-93)
Motorcraft Wash and Wax (Canada only) (CXC-95)
Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37-A)
234
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
SERVICE RECOMMENDATIONS
To help you service your vehicle, we provide scheduled maintenance
information which makes tracking routine service easy.
If your vehicle requires professional service, your authorized dealer can
provide the necessary parts and service. Check your Warranty Guide to
find out which parts and services are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service parts
conforming to specifications. Motorcraft parts are designed and built to
provide the best performance in your vehicle.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE

• Do not work on a hot engine.
• Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts.
• Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed
space, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation.
• Keep all open flames and other burning (cigarettes) material away
from the battery and all fuel related parts.
Working with the engine off

1. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P
(Park).
2. Turn off the engine and remove the key.
3. Block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly.
Working with the engine on

1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).
2. Block the wheels.
To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and/or personal burn
injuries, do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed
and do not remove it while the engine is running.
235
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
OPENING THE HOOD
1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood
release handle located under the
bottom of the instrument panel near
the steering column.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle and

release the auxiliary latch that is
located under the front center of
the hood.
3. Lift the hood and support it with the prop rod.
236
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
IDENTIFYING COMPONENTS IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT
1. Power steering fluid reservoir

2. Transaxle fluid dipstick
3. Brake fluid reservoir
4. Battery
5. Power distribution box
6. Air filter assembly
7. Engine oil dipstick
8. Engine oil filler cap
9. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
10. Engine coolant reservoir
237
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the
level is low. In very cold weather, do
not fill the reservoir completely.
Only use a washer fluid that meets
Ford specification WSB-M8B16-A2.
Do not use any special washer fluid
such as windshield water repellent
type fluid or bug wash. They may
cause squeaking, chatter noise,
streaking and smearing. Refer to the
Maintenance product
specifications and capacities section in this chapter.
State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the
use of methanol, a common windshield washer antifreeze additive.
Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used
only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the
vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or washer system.
If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below 40°F (4.5°C),
use washer fluid with antifreeze protection. Failure to use
washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could result in
impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or accident.
Note: Do not put washer fluid in the engine coolant reservoir. Washer
fluid placed in the cooling system may harm engine and cooling system
components.
CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES
1. Pull the wiper arm away from the
vehicle. Turn the blade at an angle
from the wiper arm. Push the lock
pin manually to release the blade
and pull the wiper blade down
toward the windshield to remove it
from the arm.
2. Attach the new wiper to the
wiper arm and press it into place
until a click is heard.
Replace wiper blades at least once per year for optimum performance.
238
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Poor wiper quality can be improved by cleaning the wiper blades and the
windshield, refer to Windows and wiper blades in the Cleaning
chapter.
To prolong the life of the wiper blades, it is highly recommended to
scrape off the ice on the windshield before turning on the wipers. The
layer of ice has many sharp edges and can damage the micro edge of the
wiper rubber element.
ENGINE OIL
Checking the engine oil

Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate
intervals for checking the engine oil.
1. Make sure the vehicle is on level ground.
2. Turn the engine off and wait a few minutes for the oil to drain into the
oil pan.
3. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P
(Park).
4. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine heat.
5. Locate and carefully remove the engine oil level dipstick.
239
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
6. Wipe the dipstick clean. Insert
the dipstick fully, then remove it
again.
• If the oil level is within this
range, the oil level is acceptable.
DO NOT ADD OIL.
• If the oil level is below this

mark, engine oil must be added
to raise the level within the
normal operating range.
240
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
• If required, add engine oil to the
engine. Refer to Adding engine
oil in this chapter.
• Do not overfill the engine
with oil. Oil levels above this
mark may cause engine
damage. If the engine is
overfilled, some oil must be
removed from the engine by an
authorized dealer.
7. Put the dipstick back in and

ensure it is fully seated.
Adding engine oil
1. Check the engine oil. For
instructions, refer to Checking the engine oil in this chapter.
2. If the engine oil level is not within the normal operating range, add
only certified engine oil of the recommended viscosity. Remove the
engine oil filler cap and use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the
opening.
3. Recheck the engine oil level. Make sure the oil level is not above the
normal operating range on the engine oil level dipstick.
4. Install the dipstick and ensure it is fully seated.
5. Fully install the engine oil filler cap by turning the filler cap clockwise
until it stops.
To avoid possible oil loss, DO NOT operate the vehicle with the
engine oil level dipstick and/or the engine oil filler cap removed.
241
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Engine oil and filter recommendations
Look for this certification
trademark.
Use SAE 5W-20 engine oil

Only use oils “Certified For Gasoline Engines” by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). An oil with this trademark symbol conforms
to the current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel
economy requirements of the International Lubricant Standardization and
Approval Committee (ILSAC), comprised of U.S. and Japanese
automobile manufacturers.
To protect your engine’s warranty use Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 or an
equivalent SAE 5W-20 oil meeting Ford specification WSS-M2C930-A.
SAE 5W-20 oil provides optimum fuel economy and durability
performance meeting all requirements for your vehicle’s engine.
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives, cleaners or other engine
treatments. They are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that
is not covered by Ford warranty.
Change your engine oil and filter according to the appropriate schedule
listed in scheduled maintenance information.
Ford production and aftermarket (Motorcraft) oil filters are designed for
added engine protection and long life. If a replacement oil filter is used
that does not meet Ford material and design specifications, start-up
engine noises or knock may be experienced.
It is recommended you use the appropriate Motorcraft oil filter or
another with equivalent performance for your engine application.
242
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a
Motorcraft maintenance-free battery
which normally does not require
additional water during its life of
service.
If your battery has a cover/shield, make sure it is reinstalled

after the battery has been cleaned or replaced.
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and
dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to
the battery terminals.
If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables
from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. You can neutralize the
acid with a solution of baking soda and water.
It is recommended that the negative battery cable terminal be
disconnected from the battery if you plan to store your vehicle for an
extended period of time. This will minimize the discharge of your battery
during storage.
Note: Electrical or electronic accessories or components added to
the vehicle by the dealer or the owner may adversely affect
battery performance and durability.
Batteries normally produce explosive gases which can cause
personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks or lighted
substances to come near the battery. When working near the battery,
always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide proper
ventilation.
When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure on the

end walls could cause acid to flow through the vent caps,
resulting in personal injury and/or damage to the vehicle or battery.
Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite
corners.
243
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries contain sulfuric

acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes
when working near the battery to protect against possible splashing of
acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or eyes, flush
immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt
medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician immediately.
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and

lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
Because your vehicle’s engine is electronically controlled by a computer,

some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery. When
the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the engine must
relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum driveability and
performance. To begin this process:
1. With the vehicle at a complete stop, set the parking brake.
2. Put the gearshift in P (Park), turn off all accessories and start the
engine.
3. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature.
4. Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
5. Turn the A/C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
6. Release the parking brake. With your foot on the brake pedal and with
the A/C on, put the vehicle in D (Drive) and allow the engine to idle for
at least one minute.
7. Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process.
• The vehicle may need to be driven 10 miles (16 km) or more to
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy.
• If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim, the idle
quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle
trim is eventually relearned.
If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed,
the clock and radio settings must be reset once the battery is
reconnected.
244
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
• Always dispose of automotive
RE
D
batteries in a responsible manner.
TU
A
Follow your local authorized
LE
R
standards for disposal. Call your
N
local authorized recycling center
to find out more about recycling
automotive batteries.
RECYCLE
ENGINE COOLANT
Checking engine coolant

The concentration and level of engine coolant should be checked at the
intervals listed in scheduled maintenance information. The coolant
concentration should be maintained at 50/50 coolant and distilled water,
which equates to a freeze point of -34°F (-36°C). Coolant concentration
testing is possible with a hydrometer or antifreeze tester (such as the
Rotunda Battery and Antifreeze Tester, 014–R1060). The level of coolant
should be maintained at the “FULL COLD” level or within the “COLD
FILL RANGE” in the coolant reservoir. If the level falls below, add
coolant per the instructions in the Adding engine coolant section.
Your vehicle was factory-filled with a 50/50 engine coolant and water
concentration. If the concentration of coolant falls below 40% or above
60%, the engine parts could become damaged or not work properly. A
50–50 mixture of coolant and water provides the following:
• Freeze protection down to -34°F (-36°C).
• Boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
• Protection against rust and other forms of corrosion.
• Enables calibrated gauges to work properly.
245
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
When the engine is cold, check the
level of the engine coolant in the
reservoir.
COLD FILL RANGE
• The engine coolant should be at the “FULL COLD” level or within the
“COLD FILL RANGE” as listed on the engine coolant reservoir
(depending upon application).
• Refer to scheduled maintenance information for service interval
schedules.
• Be sure to read and understand Precautions when servicing your
vehicle in this chapter.
If the engine coolant has not been checked at the recommended interval,
the engine coolant reservoir may become low or empty. If the reservoir is
low or empty, add engine coolant to the reservoir. Refer to Adding
engine coolant in this chapter.
Note: Automotive fluids are not interchangeable; do not use engine
coolant, antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified
function and vehicle location.
Adding engine coolant
When adding coolant, make sure it is a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant
and distilled water. Add the mixture to the coolant reservoir, when the
engine is cool, until the appropriate fill level is obtained.
Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot. Steam and
scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system can burn you
badly. Also, you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts.
Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer fluid

container. If sprayed on the windshield, engine coolant could
make it difficult to see through the windshield.
• Add Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant or equivalent

meeting Ford specification WSS-M97B51-A1. Refer to
Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter.
246
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Note: Use of Motorcraft Cooling System Stop Leak Pellets or an
equivalent product meeting Ford specification WSS-M99B37-B6, may
darken the color of Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant from
yellow to golden tan.
• Do not add/mix an orange-colored, extended life coolant such
as Motorcraft Specialty Orange Engine Coolant, meeting Ford
specification WSS-M97B44-D, or DEX-COOL威 brand with the
factory-filled coolant. Mixing Motorcraft Specialty Orange Engine
Coolant or any orange-colored extended life product such as
DEX-COOL威 brand with your factory filled coolant can result in
degraded corrosion protection.
• A large amount of water without engine coolant may be added, in case
of emergency, to reach a vehicle service location. In this instance, the
cooling system must be drained and refilled with a 50/50 mixture of
engine coolant and distilled water as soon as possible. Water alone
(without engine coolant) can cause engine damage from corrosion,
overheating or freezing.
• Do not use alcohol, methanol, brine or any engine coolants
mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze (coolant). Alcohol
and other liquids can cause engine damage from overheating or
freezing.
• Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant. These
can be harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the engine
coolant.
To reduce the risk of personal injury, make sure the engine is
cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap. The
cooling system is under pressure; steam and hot liquid can come out
forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly.
Note: The process stated below should only be used when the
coolant level is low and additional coolant is needed. If the
coolant system has be drained in any way, you must refer to the
Cooling section of the Workshop Manual.
1. Before you begin, turn the engine off and let it cool.
2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick cloth around the coolant
pressure relief cap on the coolant reservoir (an opaque plastic bottle).
Slowly turn cap counterclockwise (left) until pressure begins to release.
3. Step back while the pressure releases.
4. When you are sure that all the pressure has been released, use the
cloth to turn it counterclockwise and remove the cap.
247
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
• Coolant bleed valve
5. Open the coolant bleed valve.

6. Fill the coolant reservoir slowly with the proper coolant mixture (see
above), to within the “COLD FILL RANGE” or the “FULL COLD” level on
the reservoir.
7. Close the bleed valve and reinstall the cap on the coolant reservoir.
Turn the cap until it is tightly installed to prevent coolant loss.
After any coolant has been added, check the coolant concentration.
Refer to the Checking engine coolant section. If the concentration is
not 50/50 (protection to –34° F [–36° C]), drain some coolant and adjust
the concentration. It may take several drains and additions to obtain a
50/50 coolant concentration.
Whenever coolant has been added, the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle. If
necessary, add enough 50/50 concentration of engine coolant and
distilled water to bring the liquid level to the proper level.
If you have to add more than 1.0 quart (1.0 liter) of engine coolant per
month, have your authorized dealer check the engine cooling system.
Your cooling system may have a leak. Operating an engine with a low
level of coolant can result in engine overheating and possible engine
damage.
Recycled engine coolant
Ford Motor Company does NOT recommend the use of recycled engine
coolant in vehicles originally equipped with Motorcraft Premium Gold
Engine Coolant since a Ford-approved recycling process is not yet
available.
Used engine coolant should be disposed of in an appropriate

manner. Follow your community’s regulations and standards for recycling
and disposing of automotive fluids.
248
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Coolant refill capacity
To find out how much fluid your vehicle’s cooling system can hold, refer
to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter.
Fill your engine coolant reservoir as outlined in Adding engine coolant
in this section.
Severe climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates (less than –34°F [–36°C ]):
• It may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration
above 50%.
• NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60%.
• Increased engine coolant concentrations above 60% will
decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
• Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate
freeze protection at the temperatures in which you drive in the
winter months.
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
• It is still necessary to maintain the coolant concentration
above 40%.
• NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40%.
• Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will
decrease the corrosion protection characteristics of the engine
• Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will
decrease the freeze protection characteristics of the engine
• Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate
protection at the temperatures in which you drive.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme climates should use a 50/50
mixture of engine coolant and distilled water for optimum cooling system
and engine protection.
What you should know about fail-safe cooling
If the engine coolant supply is depleted, this feature allows the vehicle to
be driven temporarily before incremental component damage is incurred.
The “fail-safe” distance depends on ambient temperatures, vehicle load
and terrain.
249
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
How fail-safe cooling works
If the engine begins to overheat:
• The engine coolant temperature gauge will move to the H (hot) area.
• The symbol will illuminate.
If the engine reaches a preset over-temperature condition, the engine
will automatically switch to alternating cylinder operation. Each disabled
cylinder acts as an air pump and cools the engine.
When this occurs the vehicle will still operate. However:
• The engine power will be limited.
• The air conditioning system will be disabled.
Continued operation will increase the engine temperature and the engine
will completely shut down, causing steering and braking effort to
increase.
Once the engine temperature cools, the engine can be re-started. Take
your vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible to minimize
engine damage.
When fail-safe mode is activated
You have limited engine power when in the fail-safe mode, so drive the
vehicle with caution. The vehicle will not be able to maintain high-speed
operation and the engine will run rough. Remember that the engine is
capable of completely shutting down automatically to prevent engine
damage, therefore:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine.
2. Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to an authorized dealer.
3. If this is not possible, wait a short period for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level and replenish if low.
Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is
running or hot.
5. Re-start the engine and take your vehicle to an authorized dealer.

Driving the vehicle without repairing the engine problem
increases the chance of engine damage. Take your vehicle to an
FUEL FILTER
Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime fuel filter that is integrated with
the fuel tank. Regular maintenance or replacement is not needed.
250
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
WHAT YOU SHOULD KNOW ABOUT AUTOMOTIVE FUELS
Important safety precautions

Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank
may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire.
The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is
venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops
before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may
spray out and injure you or others.
If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap, excessive vacuum in
the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause the fuel cap
to disengage in a collision, which may result in serious personal injury.
Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death if misused or

mishandled.
Gasoline may contain benzene, which is a cancer-causing agent.
Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel:

• Extinguish all smoking materials
and any open flames before
refueling your vehicle.
• Always turn off the vehicle before
refueling.
• Automotive fuels can be harmful
or fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as gasoline is highly toxic and if
swallowed can cause death or permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed,
call a physician immediately, even if no symptoms are immediately
apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for hours.
• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind
can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation. In severe cases,
excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious
illness and permanent injury.
251
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
• Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If fuel is splashed in the eyes,
remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes and
seek medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical attention could
lead to permanent injury.
• Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin. If fuel is
splashed on the skin and/or clothing, promptly remove contaminated
clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Repeated or
prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation.
• Be particularly careful if you are taking “Antabuse” or other forms of
disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing gasoline vapors,
or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction. In sensitive
individuals, serious personal injury or sickness may result. If fuel is
splashed on the skin, promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and
water. Consult a physician immediately if you experience an adverse
reaction.
When refueling always shut the engine off and never allow
sparks or open flames near the filler neck. Never smoke while
refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain conditions.
Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes.
The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can produce static
electricity, which can cause a fire if fuel is pumped into an
ungrounded fuel container.
Refueling
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause severe
injuries. To help avoid injuries to you and others:
• Read and follow all the instructions on the pump island;
• Turn off your engine when you are refueling;
• Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle;
• Keep sparks, flames and smoking materials away from fuel;
• Stay outside your vehicle and do not leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling your vehicle — this is against the law in some places;
• Keep children away from the fuel pump; never let children pump
fuel.
252
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Use the following guidelines to avoid electrostatic charge build-up when
filling an ungrounded fuel container:
• Place approved fuel container on the ground.
• DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle (including the
cargo area).
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while
filling.
• DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill
position.
Fuel filler cap
Your fuel tank filler cap has an indexed design with a 1/4 turn on/off
feature.
When fueling your vehicle:
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Carefully turn the filler cap counterclockwise 1/4 of a turn until it
stops.
3. Pull to remove the cap from the fuel filler pipe.
4. To install the cap, align the tabs on the cap with the notches on the
filler pipe.
5. Turn the filler cap clockwise 1/4 of a turn until it clicks at least once.
If the check fuel cap light or a “check fuel cap” message comes on,
the fuel filler cap may not be properly installed. The light or message can
come on after several driving events after you’ve refueled your vehicle.
At the next opportunity, safely pull off of the road, remove the fuel filler
cap, align the cap properly and reinstall it. The check fuel cap
light or “check fuel cap” message may not reset immediately; it may
take several driving cycles for the check fuel cap light or “check fuel
cap” message to turn off. A driving cycle consists of an engine start-up
(after four or more hours with the engine off) followed by city and
highway driving.
Continuing to drive with the check fuel cap light or “check fuel cap”
message on may cause the light to turn on as well.
If you must replace the fuel filler cap, replace it with a fuel filler
cap that is designed for your vehicle. The customer warranty may
be void for any damage to the fuel tank or fuel system if the
correct genuine Ford, Motorcraft or other certified fuel filler cap
is not used.
253
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is
venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops
before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may
spray out and injure you or others.
If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap, excessive vacuum in
the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause the fuel cap
to disengage in a collision, which may result in personal injury.
Choosing the right fuel

Use only UNLEADED fuel or UNLEADED fuel blended with a maximum
of 10% ethanol. Your vehicle was not designed to run on E85 fuels that
are blended with a maximum of 85% ethanol. The use of leaded fuel is
prohibited by law and could damage your vehicle. Do not use fuel
containing methanol. It can damage critical fuel system components.
Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic
compounds, including manganese-based additives. Studies indicate that
these additives can cause your vehicle’s emission control system to
deteriorate more rapidly.
Repairs to correct the effects of using a fuel for which your vehicle was
not designed may not be covered by your warranty.
Octane recommendations
Your vehicle is designed to use
87
“Regular” unleaded gasoline with
pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87.
We do not recommend the use of (R+M)/2 METHOD
gasolines labeled as “Regular” that
are sold with octane ratings of 86 or lower in high altitude areas.
Do not be concerned if your engine sometimes knocks lightly. However, if
it knocks heavily under most driving conditions while you are using fuel
with the recommended octane rating, see your authorized dealer to
prevent any engine damage.
Fuel quality
If you are experiencing starting, rough idle or hesitation driveability
problems, try a different brand of unleaded gasoline. “Premium”
unleaded gasoline is not recommended for vehicles designed to use
“Regular” unleaded gasoline because it may cause these problems to
become more pronounced. If the problems persist, see your authorized
dealer.
254
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Do not add aftermarket fuel additive products to your fuel tank. It
should not be necessary to add any aftermarket products to your fuel
tank if you continue to use high quality fuel of the recommended octane
rating. These products have not been approved for your engine and
could cause damage to the fuel system. Repairs to correct the effects of
using an aftermarket product in your fuel may not be covered by your
warranty.
Many of the world’s automakers approved the World-Wide Fuel Charter
that recommends gasoline specifications to provide improved
performance and emission control system protection for your vehicle.
Gasolines that meet the World-Wide Fuel Charter should be used when
available. Ask your fuel supplier about gasolines that meet the
World-Wide Fuel Charter.
Cleaner air
Ford endorses the use of reformulated “cleaner-burning” gasolines to
improve air quality, per the recommendations in the Choosing the Right
Fuel section.
Running out of fuel
Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse
effect on powertrain components.
If you have run out of fuel:
• You may need to cycle the ignition from OFF to ON several times after
refueling to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to
the engine. On restarting, cranking time will take a few seconds longer
than normal.
• Normally, adding 1 gallon (3.8L) of fuel is enough to restart the
engine. If the vehicle is out of fuel and on a steep grade, more than 1
gallon (3.8L) may be required.
• The Service engine soon indicator may come on. For more
information on the Service engine soon indicator, refer to
Warning lights and chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
255
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
ESSENTIALS OF GOOD FUEL ECONOMY
Measuring techniques
Your best source of information about actual fuel economy is you, the
driver. You must gather information as accurately and consistently as
possible. Fuel expense, frequency of fill-ups or fuel gauge readings are
NOT accurate as a measure of fuel economy. We do not recommend taking
fuel economy measurements during the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of
driving (engine break-in period). You will get a more accurate
measurement after 2,000 miles–3,000 miles (3,000 km–5,000 km).
Filling the tank
The advertised fuel capacity of the fuel tank on your vehicle is equal to
the rated refill capacity of the fuel tank as listed in the Maintenance
product specifications and capacities section of this chapter.
The advertised capacity is the amount of the indicated capacity and the
empty reserve combined. Indicated capacity is the difference in the
amount of fuel in a full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates
empty. Empty reserve is the small amount of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty.
The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should
not be relied upon to increase driving range. When refueling your
vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty, you might not be
able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of the
fuel tank due to the empty reserve still present in the tank.
For consistent results when filling the fuel tank:
• Turn the engine/ignition switch to the off position prior to refueling,
an error in the reading will result if the engine is left running.
• Use the same filling rate setting (low — medium — high) each time
the tank is filled.
• Allow no more than two automatic click-offs when filling.
• Always use fuel with the recommended octane rating.
• Use a known quality gasoline, preferably a national brand.
• Use the same side of the same pump and have the vehicle facing the
same direction each time you fill up.
• Have the vehicle loading and distribution the same every time.
Your results will be most accurate if your filling method is consistent.
256
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Calculating fuel economy
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading
(in miles or kilometers).
2. Each time you fill the tank, record the amount of fuel added (in
gallons or liters).
3. After at least three to five tank fill-ups, fill the fuel tank and record
the current odometer reading.
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer
reading.
5. Follow one of the simple calculations in order to determine fuel
economy:
Calculation 1: Divide total miles traveled by total gallons used.
Calculation 2: Multiply liters used by 100, then divide by total
kilometers traveled.
Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving (city
or highway). This will provide an accurate estimate of the vehicle’s fuel
economy under current driving conditions. Additionally, keeping records
during summer and winter will show how temperature impacts fuel
economy. In general, lower temperatures give lower fuel economy.
Driving style — good driving and fuel economy habits
Give consideration to the lists that follow and you may be able to change
a number of variables and improve your fuel economy.
Habits
• Smooth, moderate operation can yield up to 10% savings in fuel.
• Steady speeds without stopping will usually give the best fuel
economy.
• Idling for long periods of time (greater than one minute) may waste
fuel.
• Anticipate stopping; slowing down may eliminate the need to stop.
• Sudden or hard accelerations may reduce fuel economy.
• Slow down gradually.
• Driving at reasonable speeds (traveling at 55 mph [88 km/h] uses 15%
less fuel than traveling at 65 mph [105 km/h]).
• Revving the engine before turning it off may reduce fuel economy.
• Using the air conditioner or defroster may reduce fuel economy.
257
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
• You may want to turn off the speed control in hilly terrain if
unnecessary shifting between the top gears occurs. Unnecessary
shifting of this type could result in reduced fuel economy.
• Warming up a vehicle on cold mornings is not required and may
reduce fuel economy.
• Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving may reduce fuel
economy.
• Combine errands and minimize stop-and-go driving.
Maintenance
• Keep tires properly inflated and use only recommended size.
• Operating a vehicle with the wheels out of alignment will reduce fuel
economy.
• Use recommended engine oil. Refer to Maintenance product
specifications and capacities in this chapter.
• Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance items. Follow the
recommended maintenance schedule and owner maintenance checks
found in scheduled maintenance information.
Conditions
• Heavily loading a vehicle may reduce fuel economy at any speed.
• Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel economy (approximately
1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is lost for every 400 lb [180 kg] of weight carried).
• Adding certain accessories to your vehicle (for example; bug
deflectors, rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski/luggage racks) may
reduce fuel economy.
• Using fuel blended with alcohol may lower fuel economy.
• Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures during the first
8–10 miles (12–16 km) of driving.
• Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel economy as compared to
driving on hilly terrain.
• Transmissions give their best fuel economy when operated in the top
cruise gear and with steady pressure on the gas pedal.
• Close windows for high speed driving.
EPA window sticker
Every new vehicle should have the EPA window sticker. Contact your
authorized dealer if the window sticker is not supplied with your vehicle.
258
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
The EPA window sticker should be your guide for the fuel economy
comparisons with other vehicles.
It is important to note the box in the lower left corner of the window
sticker. These numbers represent the Range of MPG (L/100 km)
expected on the vehicle under optimum conditions. Your fuel economy
may vary depending upon the method of operation and conditions.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a
catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with
applicable exhaust emission standards. To make sure that the catalytic
converter and other emission control components continue to work
properly:
• Use only the specified fuel listed.
• Avoid running out of fuel.
• Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving, especially at
high speeds.
• Have the items listed in scheduled maintenance information
performed according to the specified schedule.
The scheduled maintenance items listed in scheduled maintenance
information are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle
and to its emissions system.
If other than Ford, Motorcraft or Ford-authorized parts are used for
maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting
emission control, such non-Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine
Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability.
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry
ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine
compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
Illumination of the Service engine soon indicator, charging system

warning light or the temperature warning light, fluid leaks, strange odors,
smoke or loss of engine power could indicate that the emission control
system is not working properly.
An improperly operating or damaged exhaust system may allow exhaust
to enter the vehicle. Have a damaged or improperly operating exhaust
system inspected and repaired immediately.
259
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and potentially

lethal fumes into the passenger compartment.
Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine. By

law, vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures, repairs, services,
sells, leases, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not
permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent
it from working. Information about your vehicle’s emission system is on
the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the
engine. This decal also lists engine displacement.
Please consult your Warranty Guide for complete emission warranty
information.
On board diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engine’s
emission control system. This system is commonly known as the On
Board Diagnostics System (OBD-II). The OBD-II system protects the
environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet
government emission standards. The OBD-II system also assists your
authorized dealer in properly servicing your vehicle. When the Service
engine soon indicator illuminates, the OBD-II system has detected
a malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may cause the Service engine
soon indicator to illuminate. Examples are:
1. The vehicle has run out of fuel—the engine may misfire or run poorly.
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel—the engine may misfire or run
poorly.
3. The fuel cap may not have been securely tightened. See Fuel filler
cap in this chapter.
4. Driving through deep water—the electrical system may be wet.
These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank
with good quality fuel, properly tightening the fuel cap or letting the
electrical system dry out. After three driving cycles without these or any
other temporary malfunctions present, the Service engine soon
indicator should stay off the next time the engine is started. A driving
cycle consists of a cold engine startup followed by mixed city/highway
driving. No additional vehicle service is required.
If the Service engine soon indicator remains on, have your vehicle
serviced at the first available opportunity. Although some malfunctions
260
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
detected by the OBD-II may not have symptoms that are apparent,
continued driving with the Service engine soon indicator on can
result in increased emissions, lower fuel economy, reduced engine and
transmission smoothness, and lead to more costly repairs.
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing
Some state/provincial and local governments may have
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection could prevent
you from getting a vehicle registration. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M
test if the Service engine soon indicator is on or not working
properly (bulb is burned out), or if the OBD-II system has determined
that some of the emission control systems have not been properly
checked. In this case, the vehicle is considered not ready for I/M testing.
If the Service engine soon indicator is on or the bulb does not
work, the vehicle may need to be serviced. Refer to the On board
diagnostics (OBD-II) description in this chapter.
If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has just been serviced, or the
battery has recently run down or been replaced, the OBD-II system may
indicate that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. To determine if the
vehicle is ready for I/M testing, turn the ignition key to the ON position
for 15 seconds without cranking the engine. If the Service engine
soon indicator blinks eight times, it means that the vehicle is not
ready for I/M testing; if the Service engine soon indicator stays on
solid, it means that the vehicle is ready for I/M testing.
The OBD-II system is designed to check the emission control system
during normal driving. A complete check may take several days. If the
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing, the following driving cycle consisting
of mixed city and highway driving may be performed:
15 minutes of steady driving on an expressway/highway followed by 20
minutes of stop-and-go driving with at least four 30-second idle periods.
Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the
engine. Then, start the engine and complete the above driving cycle. The
engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature. Once started,
do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete. If
the vehicle is still not ready for I/M testing, the above driving cycle will
have to be repeated.
POWER STEERING FLUID
Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for the service
interval schedules.
261
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
1. Start the engine and let it run
until it reaches normal operating
temperature (the engine coolant
temperature gauge indicator will be
near the center of the normal area
between H and C).
2. While the engine idles, turn the
steering wheel left and right several
times.
3. Turn the engine off.
4. Check the fluid level in the reservoir. It should be between the MIN
and MAX lines. Do not add fluid if the level is in this range.
5. If the fluid is low, add fluid in small amounts, continuously checking
the level until it reaches the range between the MIN and MAX lines. Be
sure to put the cap back on the reservoir. Refer to Maintenance
product specifications and capacities in this chapter for the proper
fluid type.
BRAKE FLUID
The fluid level will drop slowly as
the brakes wear, and will rise when
the brake components are replaced.
Fluid levels between the “MIN” and
“MAX” lines are within the normal
operating range; there is no need to
add fluid. If the fluid levels are
outside of the normal operating
range the performance of the
system could be compromised; seek
service from your authorized dealer
immediately.
TRANSAXLE FLUID
Checking 6–speed automatic transmission fluid
Refer to your scheduled maintenance information for scheduled
intervals for fluid checks and changes. Your transaxle does not consume
fluid. However, the fluid level should be checked if the transaxle is not
working properly, i.e., if the transaxle slips or shifts slowly or if you
notice some sign of fluid leakage.
262
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Checking automatic transmission fluid at normal operating
temperature (140°F-158°F [60°C-70°C])
Automatic transmission fluid expands when warmed. To obtain an
accurate fluid check, drive the vehicle until it is warmed up
(approximately 20 miles [30 km]) until the engine coolant gauge
indicates normal operating temperature. If your vehicle has been
operated for an extended period at high speeds, in city traffic
during hot weather or pulling a trailer, the vehicle should be
turned off for about 30 minutes to allow fluid to cool before
checking.
1. Drive the vehicle 20 miles (30 km) or until the coolant gauge indicates
normal operating temperature.
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and engage the parking brake.
3. With the parking brake engaged and your foot on the brake pedal,
start the engine and move the gearshift lever through all of the gear
ranges. Allow sufficient time for each gear to engage (approximately
10–15 seconds in each position).
4. Move the gearshift lever to P (Park) and leave the engine running.
5. Remove the dipstick, wiping it clean with a clean, dry, lint-free rag. If
necessary, refer to Identifying components in the engine compartment
in this chapter for the location of the dipstick.
6. Install the dipstick making sure it is fully seated in the filler tube.
7. Remove the dipstick and inspect
the fluid level. The fluid should read
within the hot range on the dipstick
if at normal operating temperature
(140°F-158°F [60°C-70°C]).
Checking automatic transmission fluid at cool temperature
(59°F-77°F [15°C-25°C])
If a fluid check is necessary at a low
fluid temperature (59°F-77°F
[15°C-25°C]), perform the check
using the cold range on the dipstick.
However, the fluid must be
re-checked at the proper fluid temperature.
263
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Low fluid level
Do not drive the vehicle if the fluid
level does not show at all on the
dipstick.
Driving the vehicle with less than
the recommended fluid level may result in transaxle failure. An under fill
condition of transmission fluid may cause shift and/or engagement
concerns and /or possible damage to the transaxle.
High fluid level
Fluid levels above the normal
operating range may result in
transaxle failure. An overfill
condition of transmission fluid may
cause shift and/or engagement
concerns and/or possible damage to
the transaxle.
High fluid levels can be caused by an overheating condition.
Adjusting automatic transmission fluid levels
Before adding any fluid, make sure the correct type is used. The type of
fluid used is normally indicated on the dipstick and also in the
Maintenance product specifications and capacities section in this
chapter.
Note: Only one ATF fluid specification has been tested and approved for
use with the automatic 6-speed: Premium Automatic Transmission fluid.
Mercon fluids cannot be used with the automatic 6-speed without
damage or voiding warranty.
Use of a non-approved automatic transmission fluid may cause
internal transaxle component damage.
If necessary, add fluid in 1/2 pint (250 mL) increments through the filler
tube until the level is correct.
If an overfill occurs, excess fluid should be removed by an authorized
dealer.
An overfill condition of transmission fluid may cause shift and/or
engagement concerns and/or possible damage.
Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives, treatments or
cleaning agents. The use of these materials may affect transmission
operation and result in damage to internal transaxle components.
264
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
AIR FILTER
Refer to scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate
intervals for changing the air filter element.
When changing the air filter element, use only the Motorcraft air filter
element listed. Refer to Motorcraft part numbers in this chapter.
To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and/or personal burn
injuries do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed
and do not remove it while the engine is running.
Changing the air filter element

1. Release the clamps that secure
the air filter housing cover.
2. Carefully separate the two halves
of the air filter housing.
3. Remove the air filter element
from the air filter housing.
4. Wipe the air filter housing and
cover clean to remove any dirt or
debris and to ensure good sealing.
5. Install a new air filter element. Be
careful not to crimp the filter element edges between the air filter
housing and cover. This could cause filter damage and allow unfiltered
air to enter the engine if not properly seated.
6. Replace the air filter housing
cover and secure the clamps. Be
sure that the air cleaner cover tabs
are engaged into the slots of the air
cleaner housing.
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe
engine damage. The customer warranty may be void for any damage to
the engine if the correct air filter element is not used.
265
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
MOTORCRAFT PART NUMBERS
Component 3.5L V6 Engine
Engine air filter element FA-1884
Battery BXT-40R
Oil filter FL-400-SB12
1
PCV valve
2
Spark plugs
1
The PCV valve is a critical emission component. It is one of the items
listed in scheduled maintenance information and is essential to the
life and performance of your vehicle and to its emissions system.
For PCV valve replacement, see your authorized dealer. Refer to
scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for
changing the PCV valve.
Replace the PCV valve with one that meets Ford material and
design specifications for your vehicle, such as a Motorcraft or
equivalent replacement part. The customer warranty may be void
for any damage to the emissions system if such a PCV valve is not
used.
2
For spark plug replacement, see your authorized dealer. Refer to
scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for
changing the spark plugs.
Replace the spark plugs with ones that meet Ford material and
design specifications for your vehicle, such as Motorcraft or
equivalent replacement parts. The customer warranty may be
void for any damage to the engine if such spark plugs are not
used.
266
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
MAINTENANCE PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS AND CAPACITIES
Ford part number /
Item Capacity Ford part name
Ford specification
USA (fus)
Motorcraft High
Between MIN and Performance DOT 3 PM-1-C /
Brake fluid
MAX on reservoir Motor Vehicle Brake WSS-M6C62-A
2008 MKZ (378)

Fluid
XL-6 /
Door weatherstrips — Silicone Spray Lubricant
ESR-M13P4-A
Door latch, hood latch,
auxiliary hood latch, XG-4 or XL-5 /
door hinges, striker — Multi-Purpose Grease ESB-M1C93-B
plates, seat tracks and

fuel filler door hinge
Motorcraft Penetrating XL-1 /
Lock cylinders — and Lock Lubricant None
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 XO-5W20-QSP (US)
Premium Synthetic C XO-5W20–LSP12
Engine oil1 5.5 quarts (5.2L) Blend Motor Oil (US) (Canada) /
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20
Super Premium Motor WSS-M2C930-A with API
Oil (Canada) Certification Mark
Motorcraft Premium
Engine coolant 10.0 quarts (9.5L) Gold Engine Coolant VC-7-B /
with bittering agent WSS-M97B51-A1
(yellow-colored)2
Between MIN and Motorcraft MERCON威 V XT-5-QM /
Power steering fluid MAX on reservoir ATF MERCON威 V
267
Ford part number /
268
Item Capacity Ford part name
Ford specification
Automatic transmission Motorcraft Premium
7.4 quarts (7.0L)3 Automatic Transmission XT-8-QAW /
USA (fus)
fluid WSS-M2C924-A
Fluid
Motorcraft SAE 80W-90
XY-80W90-QL /
2008 MKZ (378)

Rear Differential (AWD) 2.4 pints (1.15L)
Premium Rear Axle
fluid WSP-M2C197-A
Lubricant
Power Transfer Unit Motorcraft SAE 75W-140
XY-75W140-QL /
(PTU) fluid (AWD) 4 12 ounces (0.35L) Synthetic Rear Axle
WSL-M2C192-A
Lubricant
Motorcraft Premium
ZC-32-A /
Windshield washer fluid 4.75 quarts (4.5L) Windshield Washer
WSB-M8B16-A2

Concentrate
Fuel tank (front-wheel 17.5 gallons
drive) (66.2L) — —
Fuel tank (all- wheel 16.5 gallons — —
drive) (62.5L)
1
Use of synthetic or synthetic blend motor oil is not mandatory. Engine oil need only meet the
requirements of Ford specification WSS-M2C930-A and the API Certification mark.
2
Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle.
3
Indicates only approximate dry-fill capacity. Some applications may vary based on cooler size and
if equipped with an in-tank cooler. The amount of transmission fluid and fluid level should be set
by the indication on the dipstick’s normal operating range.
4
The Power Transfer Unit is lubricated for life with synthetic lube. Lubricant levels are not to be
checked or changed unless a leak is suspected or repair required. Replace Power Transfer Unit
lubricant with specified synthetic lubricant anytime the unit is submerged in water.
See your authorized dealer for fluid level checking or filling of the Power Transfer Unit.
ENGINE DATA
Engine 3.5L-DOHC V6 engine
Displacement 3.5L
Required fuel 87 octane
Firing order 1–4–2–5–3–6
Spark plug gap (0.052–0.056 inch) 1.32–1.42 mm
Ignition system Coil on plug
Compression ratio 10.3:1
Engine drivebelt routing
• 3.5L V6 Engine
1. Short drivebelt is on first pulley groove closest to engine.
2. Long drivebelt is on second pulley groove farthest from engine.
269
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
IDENTIFYING YOUR VEHICLE
Safety Compliance Certification Label

The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require
that a Safety Compliance
Certification Label be affixed to a
vehicle and prescribe where the
Label may be located. The Safety
Compliance Certification Label is
located on the structure (B-Pillar)
by the trailing edge of the driver’s
door or the edge of the driver’s
door.
Vehicle identification number (VIN)

The vehicle identification number is
located on the driver side
instrument panel. XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Please note that in the graphic,
XXXX is representative of your
vehicle identification number.
270
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) contains the following
information:
1. World manufacturer identifier
2. Brake system / Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) / Restraint
System
3. Vehicle line, series, body type
4. Engine type
5. Check digit
6. Model year
7. Assembly plant
8. Production sequence number
TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE CODE DESIGNATIONS
You can find a
transmission/transaxle code on the
Label. The following table tells you
which transmission or transaxle
each code represents.
Description Code
Aisin AW F21 Automatic transaxle (TR-VX) B
271
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Accessories
GENUINE LINCOLN ACCESSORIES FOR YOUR VEHICLE
A wide selection of Genuine Lincoln Accessories are available for your
vehicle through your local Lincoln or Ford of Canada dealer. These
quality accessories have been specifically engineered to fulfill your
automotive needs; they are custom designed to complement the style
and aerodynamic appearance of your vehicle. In addition, each accessory
is made from high quality materials and meets or exceeds Lincoln’s
rigorous engineering and safety specifications. Ford Motor Company will
repair or replace any properly dealer-installed Genuine Lincoln
Accessories found to be defective in factory-supplied materials or
workmanship during the warranty period, as well as any component
damaged by the defective accessories. The accessories will be warranted
for whichever provides you the greatest benefit:
• 12 months or 12,000 miles (20,000 km) (whichever occurs first), or
• the remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty.
Contact your dealer for details and a copy of the warranty.
Following is a list of several Genuine Lincoln Accessories. Not all
accessories are available for all models. To find out what accessories are
available for your vehicle, please contact your dealer or visit our online
store at: www.lincolnaccessories.com.
Exterior style
Bug shields
Deflectors
Splash guards
Interior style
All weather floor mats
Electrochromatic compass/temperature interior mirrors
Premium carpeted floor mats
Lifestyle
Ash cup / smoker’s package
Cargo organization and management
TripTunes™ Advanced portable audio connection
272
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Accessories
Peace of mind
Mobile-Ease™ hands free communication system
Remote start
Vehicle security systems
Wheel locks
For maximum vehicle performance, keep the following information in
mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle:
• When adding accessories, equipment, passengers and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of
the front or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety
Compliance Certification label). Consult your authorized dealer for
specific weight information.
• The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulate the use of mobile
communications systems — such as two-way radios, telephones and
theft alarms - that are equipped with radio transmitters. Any such
equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with FCC or CRTC
regulations and should be installed only by a qualified service
technician.
• Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your
vehicle, particularly if they are not properly designed for automotive
use.
• To avoid interference with other vehicle functions, such as anti-lock
braking systems, amateur radio users who install radios and antennas
onto their vehicle should not locate the Amateur Radio Antennas in
the area of the driver’s side hood.
• Electrical or electronic accessories or components that are added to
the vehicle by the authorized dealer or the owner may adversely affect
battery performance and durability.
273
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Index
A acid, treating emergencies .....243
jumping a disabled battery ....213
Accessory delay ..........................58 maintenance-free ....................243
Air cleaner filter ...............265–266 replacement, specifications ...266
servicing ..................................243
Air conditioning ....................31, 33
Belt-Minder威 .............................119
Airbag supplemental restraint
system ........................124, 133, 136 Booster seats .............................140
and child safety seats ............126 Brakes ........................................183
description ..............124, 133, 136
disposal ....................................139 anti-lock ...........................183–184
driver airbag ............126, 134, 137 anti-lock brake system (ABS)
indicator light .........132, 135, 138 warning light ...........................183
operation .................126, 134, 137 fluid, checking and adding ....262
passenger airbag .....126, 134, 137 fluid, refill capacities ..............267
side airbag ...............................133 fluid, specifications .................267
All Wheel Drive (AWD), lubricant specifications ..........267
driving off road .........................192 parking ....................................184
Antifreeze shift interlock ..........................186
(see Engine coolant) ................245 Break-in period .............................5
Anti-lock brake system Bulbs ............................................42
(see Brakes) ......................183–184
Anti-theft system ................96, 100 C
arming the system ..................100
disarming a triggered Capacities for refilling fluids ....267
system .....................................101
Cell phone use ..............................7
Audio system (see Radio) .........16
Changing a tire .........................207
Automatic transmission
driving an automatic Child safety restraints ..............140
overdrive .................................188 child safety belts ....................140
fluid, adding ............................262 Child safety seats ......................143
fluid, checking ........................262 attaching with tether straps ..147
fluid, refill capacities ..............267 in front seat ............................144
fluid, specification ..................267 in rear seat ..............................144
Auxiliary input jack (Line in) ....23 Child safety seats - booster
Axle seats ...........................................140
lubricant specifications ..........267 Cleaning your vehicle
engine compartment ..............230
B instrument panel ....................232
interior .....................................232
Battery .......................................243 plastic parts ............................231
274
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Index
washing ....................................228 Dipstick
waxing .....................................229 automatic transmission
wheels ......................................229 fluid ..........................................262
wiper blades ............................231 engine oil .................................239
Climate control (see Air Driving under special
conditioning or Heating) ......31, 33 conditions ..................190, 193, 195
sand .........................................194
Clock ............................................55 snow and ice ...........................196
Compass, electronic through water .................194, 197
set zone adjustment .................72
E
Console
overhead ....................................54 Electronic message center .........70
Controls Emergencies, roadside
power seat ...............................103 jump-starting ..........................213
steering column ........................62 Emission control system ..........259
Coolant Engine ........................................269
checking and adding ..............245 cleaning ...................................230
refill capacities ................249, 267 coolant .....................................245
specifications ..........................267 fail-safe cooling .......................249
Cruise control idle speed control ...................243
lubrication specifications .......267
(see Speed control) ....................60 refill capacities ........................267
Cupholder(s) .............................110 service points ..................237–238
starting after a collision .........200
Customer Assistance ................198
Ford Extended Service Engine block heater .................181
Plan ..........................................224 Engine oil ..................................239
Getting assistance outside the change oil soon warning,
U.S. and Canada .....................225 message center .......................239
Getting roadside assistance ...198 checking and adding ..............239
Getting the service you dipstick ....................................239
need .........................................220 filter, specifications ........242, 266
Ordering additional owner’s recommendations ...................242
literature .................................226 refill capacities ........................267
Utilizing the specifications ..........................267
Mediation/Arbitration
Program ...................................224 Event data recording ....................6
Exhaust fumes ..........................181
D
F
Daytime running lamps
(see Lamps) ................................38 Fail safe cooling ........................249
275
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Index
Fluid capacities .........................267 autolamp system .......................37
Foglamps .....................................38 bulb specifications ....................42
daytime running lights .............38
Four-Wheel Drive vehicles flash to pass ..............................39
driving off road .......................192 high beam .................................39
Fuel ............................................251 replacing bulbs .........................43
calculating fuel turning on and off ....................37
economy ............................71, 256 Heating
cap ...........................................253 heating and air conditioning
capacity ...................................267 system .................................31, 33
choosing the right fuel ...........254 Homelink wireless control
comparisons with EPA fuel system ..........................................66
economy estimates .................258 Hood ..........................................236
detergent in fuel .....................255
filling your vehicle with I
fuel ...........................251, 253, 256
filter, specifications ........250, 266 Ignition ...............................178, 269
fuel pump shut-off switch .....200
improving fuel economy ........256 Illuminated visor mirror .............53
octane rating ...................254, 269 Infant seats
quality ......................................254 (see Safety seats) .....................143
running out of fuel .................255 Inspection/maintenance (I/M)
safety information relating to testing ........................................261
automotive fuels .....................251
Instrument panel
Fuel pump shut-off switch .......200 cleaning ...................................232
Fuses ..................................200–201 cluster ........................................10
lighting up panel and interior .39
G
J
Gas cap (see Fuel cap) ............253
Gas mileage Jack ............................................207
(see Fuel economy) .................256 positioning ...............................207
storage .....................................207
Gauges .........................................14
Jump-starting your vehicle ......213
H
K
Hazard flashers .........................199
Keyless entry system .................95
Head restraints .........................102 autolock .....................................83
Headlamps ...................................37 keypad .......................................95
aiming ........................................40 locking and unlocking doors ....96
276
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Index
programming entry code .........95 Moon roof ..............................65, 90
Keys .......................................80, 98 Motorcraft parts ........234, 250, 266
positions of the ignition .........178
N
L
Navigation system .......................30
Lamps
autolamp system .......................37 O
bulb replacement
specifications chart ..................42 Octane rating ............................254
daytime running light ...............38
fog lamps ...................................38 Oil (see Engine oil) ..................239
headlamps .................................37
headlamps, flash to pass ..........39 P
instrument panel, dimming .....39
interior lamps ...........................41 Parking brake ............................184
replacing bulbs .........................43 Parts (see Motorcraft parts) ....266
Lights, warning and indicator ....10 Passenger Occupant
anti-lock brakes (ABS) ..........183 Classification Sensor .................112
Load limits .................................171 Power distribution box
Locks (see Fuses) ...............................204
autolock .....................................83 Power door locks ........................82
childproof ..................................87 Power mirrors .............................59
doors ..........................................82
Power point .................................55
Lubricant specifications ...........267
Power steering ..........................186
Lug nuts ....................................212 fluid, checking and adding ....261
Lumbar support, seats .............105 fluid, refill capacity ................267
fluid, specifications .................267
M Power Windows ...........................56
Message center ...........................70 Power windows
english/metric button ...............75 opening using remote entry
system check button ................74 system .......................................90
warning messages .....................76
R
Mirrors ...................................58–59
automatic dimming rearview Radio ............................................16
mirror ........................................58
heated ........................................60 Relays ........................................200
programmable memory ............91 Remote entry system ...........88–89
side view mirrors (power) .......59 illuminated entry ................93–94
277
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Index
locking/unlocking doors .....89–90 Servicing your vehicle ..............235
opening the trunk .....................91 Side air curtain .........................136
opening the windows ...............90
panic alarm ...............................90 Spark plugs, specifications ......266,
replacement/additional 269
transmitters ...............................92 Specification chart, lubricants .267
replacing the batteries .............92 Speed control ..............................60
Reverse sensing system ...........190 Starting your vehicle ........178–180
Roadside assistance ..................198 jump starting ..........................213
Steering wheel
S controls ......................................62
tilting .........................................53
Safety Belt Maintenance ..........118 SYNC ............................................30
Safety belts (see Safety
restraints) ..................110, 114–118 T
Safety Canopy ...........................133
Tilt steering wheel ......................53
Safety defects, reporting ..226–227
Tire Pressure Monitoring
Safety restraints ........110, 114–118 System (TPMS)
Belt-Minder威 ...........................119 Tires, Wheels and Loading ....166
extension assembly ................118
for adults .........................115–117 Tires ...........................151–152, 207
for children .....................139–140 alignment ................................159
Occupant Classification care ..........................................155
Sensor ......................................112 changing ..................................207
safety belt maintenance .........118 checking the pressure ............155
warning light and chime ........119 inflating ...................................153
label .........................................165
Safety seats for children ..........143 replacing ..................................157
Safety Compliance rotating ....................................159
Certification Label ....................270 safety practices .......................158
sidewall information ...............160
Satellite Radio Information ........26 snow tires and chains ............171
Seats ..........................................102 spare tire .................................207
child safety seats ....................143 terminology .............................152
climate control ........................107 tire grades ...............................152
front seats .......................102, 106 treadwear ........................151, 156
heated ........................................31 Towing .......................................176
memory seat .....................91, 106 recreational towing .................176
SecuriLock passive anti-theft trailer towing ..........................176
system ..........................................96 wrecker ....................................218
278
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
Index
Traction control ........................185 Ventilating your vehicle ...........181
Transmission .............................186
brake-shift interlock (BSI) ....186 W
fluid, refill capacities ..............267
lubricant specifications ..........267 Warning lights (see Lights) .......10
Trunk ...........................................87 Washer fluid ..............................238
remote release ....................79, 91
Water, Driving through .............197
Turn signal ..................................41
Windows ......................................90
U opening using remote entry
system .......................................90
USB port ......................................25 power .........................................56
V Windshield washer fluid and
wipers ..........................................52
Vehicle Identification Number checking and adding fluid .....238
(VIN) ..........................................270 replacing wiper blades ...........238
Vehicle loading ..........................171 Wrecker towing .........................218
279
2008 MKZ (378)

USA (fus)
280

2008 Lincoln MKZ Owners Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2008 Lincoln MKZ Owners Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2008 Lincoln MKZ Owners Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Table of Contents

2008 MKZ (378)

2008 MKZ (378)

All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic or mechanical

2008 MKZ (378)

2008 MKZ (378)

Warning symbols in this guide

Warning symbols on your vehicle

2008 MKZ (378)

Front seat mounted rear-facing child or infant seats should

Service Data Recording

2008 MKZ (378)

Export unique (Non–United States/Canada) vehicle specific

2008 MKZ (378)

Vehicle Symbol Glossary

Safety Alert See Owner’s Guide

Fasten Safety Belt Airbag - Front

Child Seat Lower

Child Seat Tether

Anti-Lock Brake System Parking Brake System

Stability Control System Speed Control

Master Lighting Switch Hazard Warning Flasher

Fog Lamps-Front Fuse Compartment

Fuel Pump Reset Windshield Wash/Wipe

Windshield Rear Window

2008 MKZ (378)

Vehicle Symbol Glossary

Child Safety Door Interior Luggage

Panic Alarm Engine Oil

Do Not Open When Hot Battery

Avoid Smoking, Flames,

Explosive Gas Fan Warning

Service Engine Soon Engine Air Filter

Low Tire Pressure

2008 MKZ (378)

2008 MKZ (378)

Under engine misfire conditions, excessive exhaust temperatures

Check fuel cap: Illuminates when

Anti-lock brake system: If the

2008 MKZ (378)

Engine oil pressure: Illuminates

2008 MKZ (378)

O/D off: Illuminates when the

Key-in-ignition warning chime: Sounds when the key is left in the

2008 MKZ (378)

Speedometer: Indicates the

Engine coolant temperature

2008 MKZ (378)

Odometer: Registers the total miles

2008 MKZ (378)

Premium/Audiophile AM/FM in-dash six CD/MP3 satellite

Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control,

Accessory delay: Your vehicle is equipped with accessory delay. With

2008 MKZ (378)

2008 MKZ (378)

2008 MKZ (378)

2008 MKZ (378)

2008 MKZ (378)

11. SEEK: In radio or CD

2008 MKZ (378)